COLOR LASER COPIER 1120/1130/1150 REVSION 0 MAR. 1999 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. FY8-13G3-000 CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
IMPORTANT THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC., JAPAN, TO SERVE AS A SOURCE OF REFERENCE FOR WORK IN THE FIELD. SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY FROM ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTED MATTER. ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY.
INTRODUCTION This Service Manual contains basic data and figures on the plain paper CLC1120/ 1130/1150 needed to service the machine in the field. The copier is designed to enable fully automated copying work, and may be configured with the following options: 1. 2. 3. 4. RDF-E2 Stapler Sorter-F1 Film Projector-D1 Paper Deck-E1 For the RDF-E2, Stapler Sorter-F1, and Film Projector-D1, see their respective Service Manuals for details.
Chapter 9 Externals/Auxiliary Mechanisms shows the copier’s external parts, and explains the principles used for the copier’s various control mechanisms in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted. Chapter 10 Paper Deck discusses the principles of operation used for the series of operations between pickup and delivery performed by the paper deck.
System Configuration The CLC1120/1130/1150 may be configured as follows to make up a system (the shaded areas indicate accessories): RDF-E2 Feeds a large number of originals automatically for continuous copying. Accepts double-sided originals. CLC Film Projector-D1 Projects 35mm negative or positive film, large-size negative film, or transparencies for making color copies. Editor-F1 Enables selecting areas and colors using a point pen. Stapler Sorter-F1 Sorts or groups copies. Staples sorted copies.
CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION I. II. III. IV. FEATURES..................................1-1 SPECIFICATIONS .......................1-2 A. Type ........................................1-2 B. System ...................................1-2 C. Functions................................1-3 D. Others ....................................1-4 E. Default Ratios.........................1-4 F. Copying Speed ......................1-5 G. CLC Paper Deck-E1...............1-6 NAMES OF PARTS ....................
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM I. II. III. OPERATION................................3-1 A. Outline ....................................3-1 B. Basic Sequence of Operations..............................3-2 1. Sequence of Operations........................3-2 2. Scanner Home Position Sensor and Operation ......3-3 SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM .......3-4 A. Controlling the Scanner Motor ......................................3-4 1. Outline ..............................3-4 2. Operations........................3-5 B.
V. 2. Bank Note Detection Mechanism .................... P. CMYBk/RGB Integration ..... Q. Texture Processing ............. R. Color Conversion ................ DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... A. Electrical Parts .................... 1. Removing the CCD Unit ................................ 4-17 2. Removing the Analog Processor PCB ............. 4-18 3. Removing the Image Processor PCB (IP-MAIN, IP-ED, IF, IP-ECO) ........ 4-19 4-14 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-16 4-17 CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM I. II. III. IV.
IV. viii C. Controlling the Attraction Charging Mechanism and Transfer Charging Current .. 6-20 1. Operations..................... 6-20 D. Controlling the Separation Charging Current ................ 6-21 1. Operation ...................... 6-21 E. Controlling the External/Internal Static Eliminating Current ... 6-23 1. Operation ...................... 6-23 F. Controlling the Post-Cleaning Charging Current ................ 6-24 1. Operations..................... 6-24 G.
2. Construction of the Bk Developing Assembly.... 6-65 3. Removing the Developing Assembly ....................... 6-65 4. Removing the ATR Sensor of the Y/M/C Developing Assembly ....................... 6-66 5. Removing the Developing Cylinder ...... 6-67 6. Adjusting the S-B Gap .. 6-71 7. Replacing the Developer ...................... 6-71 E. Hoppe Assembly ................. 6-74 1. Opening the Hopper ..... 6-74 2. Removing the Hopper Unit ................................ 6-74 3.
III. IV. V. x 5. Sequence of Operations (pickup from the cassette)........................ 7-14 D. Pickup from the Multifeeder .......................... 7-15 1. Operations..................... 7-15 2. Detecting the Size of Paper ............................. 7-16 3. Movement of the Lifter .. 7-17 4. Sequence of Operations..................... 7-18 E. Picking Up Transparencies .................... 7-19 DUPLEXING UNIT (CLC1150 ONLY) ..................... 7-21 A. Outline .................................
4. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration of the Duplexing Unit ............... 7-68 5. Adjusting the Position of the Paper Jogging Guide Sensor (PS40) .............. 7-69 6. Assembling the Paper Jogging Guide Plate Drive Assembly ............. 7-70 7. Position of the Stopper Plate Solenoid ............... 7-70 8. Position of the Duplexing Paper Feed Roller Solenoid ........................ 7-70 9. Position of the Stacking Guide Solenoid ............. 7-71 D. Pickup Motor Drive Assembly .....................
H. Duplexing Delivery Assembly (CLC1150 only) ................. 7-102 1. Removing the Duplexing Delivery Assembly ...... 7-102 2. Position of the Delivery Assembly Paper Deflecting Plate Drive Solenoid (SL10) .......... 7-102 CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM I. II. III. IV. xii OPERATIONS .............................8-1 A. Outline ....................................8-1 B. Sequence of Operations (fixing system) ........................8-3 FIXING DRIVE SYSTEM ............8-4 A.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL / AUXILIARY MECHANISM I. CONTROL PANEL ......................9-1 A. Outline ....................................9-1 II. DOWNLOADING .........................9-2 A. Outline ....................................9-2 III. COUNTERS ................................9-3 A. Outline ....................................9-3 IV. FANS ...........................................9-4 A. Outline ....................................9-4 B. Operations..............................9-6 1.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK I. II. III. xiv PAPER DECK .......................... 10-1 A. Inputs to and Outputs from the Deck Driver ........... 10-1 B. Pickup ................................. 10-4 1. Outline ........................... 10-4 2. Pickup Operations ......... 10-4 3. Sequence of Operations (pickup) ......................... 10-6 C. Detecting Paper in the Deck .................................... 10-7 1. Detecting the Presence/ Absence of Paper.......... 10-7 2. Switching the Deck Paper Size .....
CHAPTER 11 INSTARATION I. II. III. SELECTING THE SITE ............ 11-1 INSTALLATION ........................ 11-4 A. Unpacking ........................... 11-4 B. Removing the Fixing Materials and Mounting the Waste Toner Collection Case ................... 11-7 C. Supplying Fixing Oil ............ 11-9 D. Mounting the Drum Cleaner and Setting the Environment Switch ................................ 11-11 E. Supplying Toner ................ 11-15 F. Supplying the Starter Developer ........................
1. Environment of the Site ........................ 13-51 2. Checking the Originals against Symptoms ...... 13-51 3. Checking the Copyboard Cover, Copyboard Glass, and Standard White Plate ............................ 13-51 4. Checking the Charging Assemblies .................. 13-51 5. Checking the Developing Assembly ..................... 13-51 6. Checking the Paper..... 13-52 7. Checking Periodically Replaced Parts ........... 13-52 8. Others ......................... 13-52 B. Standard Images ...........
E. FUNCTION (operation check mode) .. F. OPTION (settings mode) G. PG (test print) .................. H. COUNTER (counter mode) ................ 13-282 13-305 13-321 VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS ............... A. Copier.............................. B. RDF ................................. C. Sorter .............................. 13-329 13-329 13-350 13-351 13-323 APPENDIX A. B. C. GENERAL TIMING CHART ....................................... A-1 SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS .......................
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION This chapter shows the copiers specifications, and provides an outline of how to operate the copier and how copies are generated. I. II. III. IV. FEATURES..................................1-1 SPECIFICATIONS .......................1-2 A. Type ........................................1-2 B. System ...................................1-2 C. Functions................................1-3 D. Others ....................................1-4 E. Default Ratios.........................
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION I. FEATURES 1. High Image Quality The copier uses micro-diameter toner and a limited amount of silicone oil, ensuring a thin layer of toner on transparencies. It allows changing the hues of magenta toner and, together with the use of a direct mapping method, enables a wider range of color reproduction. 2. High Productivity The copier turns out as many as 11 copies per minute in full color, or 42 mono-color copies. It takes as little as 18.4 sec to generate each first copy.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION II. SPECIFICATIONS A. Type Item Specifications Body Console (reader and printer constructed as one) Copyboard Fixed Light source Halogen lamp Lens Arranged in an array Image reader Photocell (BRG line CCD; fixed, mirror scanning) Photosensitive medium OPC drum (180-mm dia.) Table 1-201 B.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION C. Functions Item Specifications Resolution Gradation Original type Maximum original size Copy size Zoom Wait time First copy time (w/o pre-scanning) Continuous copying Copying speed Copy size Copy paper type Cassette Multifeeder Duplexing unit Copy tray Image margin Auto clear Auto power-off Power Save mode Accessories Reader: 400 x 400 dpi Recorder: 800-equivalent x 400 dpi 256 gradations Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.) A3 (297 x 420 mm) / 279.4 x 431.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION D. Others Item Specifications Operating environment Temperature: Humidity: Atmospheric pressure: 15° to 30°C / 59 to 86 °F 5% to 80% 810 to 1013 hPa (0.8 to 1.0 atm) Power supply 100V / 50, 60Hz 120V / 60Hz, 230V / 50Hz Serial No.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION b. North America (5R4E) Item Enlargement Default ratio I II III IV Reduction 1 : 1.214 1 : 1.294 1 : 2.000 1 : 4.000 I II III IV V 1 : 0.25 1 : 0.50 1 : 0.647 1 : 0.733 1 : 0.785 Table 1-205b c. Europe (3R3E) Item Enlargement Default ratio I II III Reduction 1 : 1.414 1 : 2.000 1 : 4.000 I II III 1 : 0.25 1 : 0.50 1 : 0.707 Table 1-205c F. Copying Speed Size A3 (297 x 420 mm) A4 (210 x 297 mm) AAR (297 x 210 mm) B4 (257 x 364 mm) B5 (182 x 257 mm) 279.4 x 431.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION G. CLC PAPER DECK-E1 Item Specifications Pickup No claw (retard) Storage Side tray Copy paper type Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) Copy paper size A4, B5, LTR Storage size 2500 sheets (105 g/m2) Serial No. ZRU ****** ZRT ***** ZRS ***** Paper size switch (OPTION>ACC>DK-P) By size guide plate in steps and in service mode Dimensions Width: Depth: Height: Width 30.6 kg / 67.4 lb Power supply DC, from the copier Operating environment Same as the copier 323.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION III. NAMES OF PARTS A. External View [2] [1] [12] [3] [11] [10] [4] [9] [5] [8] [6] [7] Figure 1-301 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Control panel Copyboard cover Multifeeder tray Right lower cover Control key Power switch Pickup cassette (CLC1130) Duplexing tray (CLC1150) COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION [2] [1] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [9] [8] Figure 1-302 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] 1-8 Fixing assembly knob Connector for downloading (bi-Centronics) Left front door switch Bk toner supply mouth M toner supply mouth C toner supply mouth Y toner supply mouth Right front door switch Unit drawer lever COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION B.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION [1] [26] [2] [3] [25] [24] [23] [4] [5] [6] [8] [7] [22] [21] [20] [19] [18] [9] [10] [11] [12] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] Figure 1-304 (LCL1150) [1] External delivery roller [2] Internal delivery roller [3] Postcard feed roller (100V model only) [4] Registration roller [5] Attraction roller [6] Pre-registration roller 1 [7] Duplexing reversing roller [8] Pre-registration roller 2 [9] Multifeeder feed roller 2 [10] Multifeeder feed roller 1 [11] Multifeeder separa
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION [1] [2] [3] [4] [18] [17] [5] [6] [16] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [15] [14] [13] [12] Figure 1-305 (CLC1130) [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] External delivery roller Internal delivery roller Postcard feed roller (100V model only) Registration roller Attraction roller Pre-registration roller 1 Pre-registration roller 2 Multifeeder feed roller 2 Multifeeder feed roller 1 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION IV. USING THE COPIER A.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION B. Extended Functions Mode Description Mode Memory Use it to save or call back copying mode. Recall Use it to call back up to three most recent copying modes, or to make copies using such modes. Two-Page Separation Use it to make copies of the left and right pages of an open book on separate sheets by a single operation. Composion Use it to reduce two originals automatically and copy them on a single sheet of paper.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION C. User Mode Mode Custom Settings Description Standard Key Settings Use it to register a preference key to be displayed on the Standard screen. (none*) Standard Display window Use it to select the screen to be displayed at power-on. (none*, extension mode, mode memory, call) Energy Saver Adjustment Use it to select an energy saving level. (-10%, -25%, -50%, non-recovery, in which control panel indicators are turned off) Inch Entry Use it to enable input in inches.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Mode Timer Settings Adjustment/ Cleaning Description Auto Clear Time Use it to set the time after which the touch panel returns to the Standard screen at the end of operation. (0 to 9 min/2 min*) Auto Energy Saver Time Use it to set the time after which energy save mode starts. (0 min to 8 hr/30 min*) Auto Power-Off Time Use it to set the time after which the power is turned off when the copier is ready for copying or in energy save mode.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION V. DAILY MAINTENANCE BY THE USER Instruct the user to clean the copyboard glass and the copyboard cover once a week without fail. (To clean, wipe the part with a cloth moistened (well wrung) with water or solution of mild detergent, and dry wipe it thereafter.) Caution: Take care not to scratch the reflecting face (silver colored) of the copyboard cover. 1-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION VI. SAFETY A. Safety of Laser Light (Class I Laser Product) The copier is certified as a Class I product under the Radiation Performance Standards set forth in 1968 by the Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) of the United States, indicating that the copier will not emit harmful laser radiation. (The copier’s laser mechanisms are contained in a protective housing and enclosed by external covers so that its laser beam is fully blocked while it is in use.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION B. CDRH Regulations On August 2, 1976, the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the US Food and Drug Administration put into force a set of regulations governing laser products. The regulations apply to laser products produced on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products within the US is prohibited unless they show compliance with the regulations.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION C. Handling the Laser Assembly Be sure to take extra care whenever servicing areas of the copier’s laser assembly, as by avoiding the insertion of any tool having a high reflectance. Be sure also to remove any watches and rings. They can reflect the laser beam to damage your eyes during work. The copier’s laser beam is a red light. Any covers that may reflect the laser beam bear a copy of the label shown in Figure 1-603.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Figure 1-602b Figure 1-602c 1-20 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION D. Safety of Toner Toner is non-toxic element matter composed of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dyes. If your skin or clothes have come into contact with toner, be sure to remove as much of it as possible with tissue paper and then wash with water. Hot water will cause toner to turn into jelly and become fused with cloth fibers, resisting removal. Further, toner tends to react to vinyl material. Keep it away from vinyl materials.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION VII. IMAGE FORMATION A. Outline The copier uses an indirect photostatic method, and is constructed as shown in Figure 1-701.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The copier’s image formation processes are grouped into the following 11 steps: Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Pre-exposure Primary charging (negative DC) Laser exposure Development (negative DC bias; AC) Attraction (positive, negative DC) Transfer (positive, negative DC) Separation (negative DC, AC) Photosensitive drum cleaning Post-cleaning charging (negative DC) Fixing Internal/external static removal Static image formation
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION B. Auxiliary Process 1. Post-Cleaning Charging The photosensitive drum may become subject to memories because of transfer discharge, appearing on copy images. To prevent such a problem, a negative DC is applied to the drum thereby evening out the charges and, consequently, potential. Post-cleaning charging assembly Photosensitive drum Figure 1-703 1-24 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION This chapter explains the copier’s basic operations and functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems, and provides an outline of the timing at which various associated parts are driven. Process speed I. II. OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS ......2-1 A. Functional Construction .........2-1 B. Electrical Circuitry ..................2-2 BASIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS .............................2-4 A. At Power-On ...........................2-4 B.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION I. OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS A. Functional Construction The copier is divided into a total of six functional blocks; i.e., original exposure system, image processing system, laser exposure system, image formation system, pickup/feeding system, and control system.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION B. Electrical Circuitry 1. Outline The copier’s major electrical functions are controlled by the CPU on the CPU PCB. Table 2101 shows the functional assignment of the CPU and the functions of the DIMMs and the RAMs. 2. CPU PCB The CPU PCB is equipped with three CPUs, and this manual refers to these three as PANELCPU, R-CPU, and DC-CPU with reference to their functions.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) DC Load • Fans Accessories • Editor • Projector • Etc. IP motherboard Bi-Centronics I/F Scanner motor driver PM15 Analog processor CCD driver PCB DIMM downloading CCD CPU PANELCPU R-CPU Control panel Flash memory Flash memory DCCPU HVT-DC PCB DC Loads • Clutch • Solenoid • Motor • Sensor • Etc.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION II. BASIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A. At Power-On Figure 2-201 shows the basic sequence of operations executed at power-on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Period From when the power switch is turned on to when the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller reaches 130°C. Purpose Waits until the fixing roller warms up. AINTR (initial multiple rotation) From when the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller reaches 130°C to when it reaches 158°C. Measures and controls the drum surface potential. STBY (standby) From when INTR ends to when the Copy Start key is turned on or the power switch is turned off.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION B. Basic Sequence of Operations (copying) Figure 2-202 shows the basic sequence of operations executed during copying.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION C. Generating the Image Leading Edge Signal 1. Outline The copier controls original exposure, image processing, laser exposure, high voltage, and feeding mechanisms with reference to the leading edge of copy paper (image leading edge signal) on the transfer drum. The image leading edge signal is generated about 0.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION 2. Controlling Side A and Side B The transfer drum retains as many as two sheets of copy paper at the same time. As such, two signal plates operating in conjunction with the transfer drum and the sensors (PS2, side A sensor; PS3, side B sensor) found inside the transfer drum are used to generate image leading signals of their own (ITOP-A, ITOP-B).
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION DSRDY INTR COPY Photosensitive drum revolution 1 Transfer drum revolution 1 B Transfer drum side A/side B LSTR STBY 9 9 A B A B A Side A sensor (PS2) Side B sensor (PS3) Drum motor (M2) Figure 2-206 b. Transfer Drum When Copying on Side B The tables that follow show how sheets of copy paper are placed on the transfer drum in each copying mode; in mono-color copying, C, Y, and Bk use the same arrangement as M.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION III. CONTROLLING ELECTRICAL MECHANISMS A. Controlling the Main Motor (M4) 1. Outline Table 2-301 shows the functions of the main motor control circuit, and Figure 2-301 shows a block diagram of circuit. Item Description Power supply 38 VDC from the DC power supply PCB. Drive signal Drive signal (MNMON) from the DC driver PCB. Moving/drive parts Registration roller, attraction roller, developing assembly, multifeeder feed roller. Control Turing on/off the main motor.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION a. Turning On/Off the Main Motor When the DC-CPU on the CPU PCB causes the main motor drive signal (MNMON) to go ‘1’ through the DC driver PCB, the control circuit on the main motor driver PCB generates drive current to rotate the main motor at a specific speed. When the drive signal goes ‘0’, on the other hand, the output of the control signal stops, removing the drive current and, thus, stopping the main motor. b.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION B. Controlling the Drum Motor (M2) 1. Outline Table 2-302 shows the functions of the drum motor control circuit, and Figure 2-302 is a block diagram of the circuit.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION a. Turning On/Off the Drum Motor When the DC-CPU on the CPU PCB causes the drum motor drive signal (DRMON) to go ‘1’ through the DC driver PCB, the control circuit on the drum motor drive PCB generates drive current to rotate the drum motor at a constant speed. When the drive signal goes ‘0’, on the other hand, the output of the control signal stops, and the absence of drive current prevents the drum motor from rotating. b.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION C. Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs Inputs to and Outputs from the CPU PCB (1/4) CPU PCB J2201 J2102 J2002 J2103 Analog processor PCB CCD/CCD driver PCB J2101 J241 J217 J242 J218 J205 Image processor main PCB IP-PRJ PCB J214 J215 J201 J223 J224 J225 External device J2012 Image processor motherboard Image processor ED/IF PCB (accessory) See p. 4-3.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to and Outputs from the CPU PCB (2/4) CPU PCB Scanner motor driver PCB Scanner motor J603 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 PM15 See p. 3-4. J602 J2003 See p. 3-4. Scanner home position sensor PS1 J622 -1 -2 -3 +5V J604 -3 -2 SCHP -1 See p. 3-3. +15V FM1 J807 -3 -1 -2 Original exposure system cooling fan 1 J2002 -A11 +24V -A12 SL1FMERR -A13 SL1FMON1 SL1FMON2 J907 J908 See p. 9-6. LCD/touch panel In response to an error, returns ERR=1 to the PCB.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to and Outputs from the CPU PCB (3/4) PCU PCB Control Card-V CC-V J820 -2 -4 -3 -1 J2001 -2 -4 -3 -1 J817 J816 J814 CCX J813 J2011 J808 J2004A J1005 J1006 J2007 J2008 +5V CCX main PCB ECO PCB DC driver PCB Memory PCB J2010 Flash memory downloading J2005 Bi-Centronics I/F PCB J2002B Editor J2002A Projector J2002A RDF Figure 2-305 2-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to and Outputs from the CPU PCB (4/4) +15V FM2 Exhaust fan J2051 -A7 -A9 EXFMERR -A8 J745 -3 -1 -2 +24V CPU PCB EXFMON1 EXFMON2 See p. 9-6. In response to an error, returns ERR=1 to the PCB. +24V FM3 Primary charging assembly fan J723 -3 -1 -2 -B1 +15V -B3 PCFMERR -B2 PCFMON1 PCFMON2 See p. 9-6. In response to an error, returns ERR=1 to the PCB. +24V FM4 Laser scanner motor cooling fan J735 -3 -1 -2 J733 -A1 -A3 -A2 SCFMERR SCFMON See p. 9-6.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Driver PCB (1/13) DC driver PCB Transfer driver PCB Side A sensor PS2 Side B sensor C sensor PS3 PS4 J575 -1 -2 -3 J322 -B9 -B8 -B7 J581 -1 -2 -3 -A5 -A4 -A3 J576 -1 -2 -3 -B6 -B5 -B4 +5V J321 -B3 J1014 -B8 AITOP When the transfer drum is at the side A image leading edge, '1'. (The light-blocking plate is at PS2.) +5V -B4 -B7 BITOP -B6 -B5 -B8 -B3 -B9 -B2 When the transfer drum is not at the side B image leading edge, '1'.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Driver PCB (2/13) DC driver PCB Fixing oil level sensor Upper fixing cleaning belt length sensor Internal delivery sensor Multifeeder paper sensor PS10 PS11 J512 -1 -2 -3 PS12 J511 -1 -2 -3 PS15 Multifeeder pickup sensor PS9 Multifeeder lifter H sensor Cassette 1 paper sensor (CLC1120/1130) J641 -1 -2 -3 J500 +5V J1004 -B4 -B5 -B6 FXOILD -B2 UFRCWD -B3 INDELD When fixing oil is present, '1'.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Driver PCB (3/13) · CLC1120/1130 DC driver PCB Pickup driver PCB Pickup vertical path 1 sensor Cassette 2 lifter position sensor PS21 J652 J644 J346 +5V -1 -3 -2 -2 PUVP1AD* -3 -1 PS22 J628 J621 J347 -11 -1 -10 -2 -9 -3 +5V PS23 J655 J645 J348 -1 -11 -2 -10 -3 -9 +5V PS24 J627 J621J347 -14 -1 -13 -2 -12 -3 J344 -12 J1018 -A5 PS25 J654 J645J348 +5V -1 -14 -2 -13 C3PAD* -3 -12 J341 -A15 J1017 -A4 PS26 J631 J622 J347 +5V -3 -1 -2 -2 -1 PUVP2D* -3
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Driver PCB (4/13) (CLC1150 only) DC driver PCB Pickup driver PCB Cassette 1 lifter position sensor Cassette 2 lifter position sensor Cassette 1 paper sensor Cassette 2 paper sensor DPS22 J628 J621 J347 -1 -11 -2 -10 -3 -9 DPS23 J655 J645 J348 -1 -11 -2 -10 -3 -9 DPS24 J627 J621J347 -14 -1 -13 -2 -12 -3 DPS25 J654 J645J348 -1 -14 -2 -13 -3 -12 Pickup vertical path 2 sensor Pickup vertical path 3 sensor Re-pickup vertical path sensor +5V C2LFD* J34
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Driver PCB (5/13) (CLC1150 only) DC driver PCB External delivery sensor Delivery vertical path 1 sensor Delivery vertical path 2 sensor PS31 PS32 PS33 J538 -1 -2 -3 J536 J707 -1 -2 -3 J701 +5V J1008 When PS31 detects -B3 -B2 OTDELD* copy paper, '0'. (When the light-blocking plate -B1 is at PS31.) +5V J1029 -7 -6 DLVP1D -5 When PS32 detects copy paper, '1'. (When the light-blocking plate is at PS32.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Driver PCB (6/13) (CLC1120/1130) DC driver PCB External paper sensor Right front cover sensor Left front cover sensor Delivery cover sensor Pickup cover sensor PS31 J538 -1 -2 -3 J523 PS41 J530 -1 -2 -3 J737 -1 -2 -3 J734 J739 PS43 J741 -1 -2 -3 J524 PS44 J531 -1 -2 -3 PS42 J536 J534 J1008 +5V -B3 When PS31 detects -B2 OTDELD* copy paper, '0'. -B1 (When the light-blocking plate is at PS31.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Driver PCB (7/13) (CLC1150 only) DC driver PCB Right front cover senosr Left front cover sensor Delivery cover sensor Pickup cover senosr J530 -1 -2 -3 J523 J737 -1 -2 -3 J734 J739 PS43 J741 -1 -2 -3 J524 PS44 J531 -1 -2 -3 PS41 PS42 +5V J1027 -B9 -B8 RCOVD -B7 When the right front cover is closed, '1'. (When the light-blocking plate is at PS41.) +5V -A9 -A8 -A7 LCOVD When the left front cover is closed, '1'.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Drive PCB (8/13) DC driver PCB M developing assembly HP sensor C developing assembly HP sensor Y developing assembly HP sensor Bk developing assembly HP sensor Transfer drum HP sensor Transfer drum cleaner HP sensor PS49 J599 J588 J336 -9 -1 -8 -2 -7 -3 PS51 J600 J589 -1 -2 -3 -6 -5 -4 PS53 J601 -1 -2 -3 -3 -2 -1 PS55 J598 J588 -12 -1 -11 -2 -10 -3 Developing engagement driver PCB +5V J322 -B11 J1016 -B2 When the M developing assembly is at the
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Driver PCB (9/13) DC driver PCB Cassette 2 paper length sensor (CLC1120 only) PSU2 Cassette 3 paper length sensor (CLC1130 only) J617 -1 -3 -4 -2 J608 J619 -1 -3 -4 -2 J612 PSU3 Cassette 2 paper length sensor (CLC1150 only) DPSU3 J503 Upper fixing thermistor 1 J506 Upper fixing thermistor 2 +5V J1019 -B9 -B7 C2SZ0 -B6 C2SZ1 -B8 +5V J1018 -B9 -B7 C3SZ0 -B6 -B8 C3SZ1 See p. 7-11.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Driver PCB (10/13) (CLC1120/1130) DC driver PCB Cassette 1 paper level detecting VR VR2 -2 -B4 -3 -B3 VR3 Operates in conjunction with the -B11 C2PWVR side plate of the cassette 2, and detects the level of copy paper. -B10 (analog signal) -2 -3 VR4 -B3 -2 -B2 C2PLVR -B1 -3 VR5 -B11 C3PWVR -B10 -2 -3 VR6 Operates in conjunction with the lifter shaft of the cassette 2, and detects the level of copy paper.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Driver PCB (11/13) (CLC1150 only) DC driver PCB Cassette 1 paper level detecting VR DVR4 -B2 D1PLVR -B1 -2 -3 DVR5 Operates in conjunction with the side plate of the cassette 2, and D2PWVR detects the level of copy paper. -B10 (analog signal) -2 -B11 -3 DVR6 +5V J660 J611 -1 Cassette 2 paper level detecting VR Operates in conjunction with the lifter shaft of the cassette 1, and detects the level of copy paper.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Driver PCB (12/13) DC driver PCB M toner level sensor TS1 J678 -3 -2 -1 J671 +5V J1021 -A7 -A8 MTEP -A9 When the toner inside the M hopper is below a specific level, '1'.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Driver PCB (13/13) DC driver PCB J711 J1024 A2 SW2 Control switch N.O. A3 J535 Waste toner feedscrew lock detecting switch KEYSW* J1012 A2 SW7 N.O. WTNRBD A1 When the control switch is inserted, '0'. When clogging by toner is detected, '1'. Registration path driver PCB Transparency sensor PS69L J552 -2 -1 J312 -A13 -A14 PS69S J553 -1 -3 -2 -A11 -A13 -A11 +5V J311 -B9 J1013 -B9 OHPDTC When the sensor detects copy paper, '1'.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver (1/15) J1024-A1 SHUTOFF* SW1 ELCB LF1 DC driver PCB DCP Power switch Leakage breaker UN23 DC power supply PCB +38V +24V +5V Noise filter UN29 Delivery door Left front switch (CLC1150 only) door switch SW5 SW4 Transfer unit lever switch SW3 +15V +24V RL3 DC fuse PCB +24V +38V +38V +24V +15V +5V To PCBs +15V +38V DC power cut relay RL1 AC power cut relay SW6 Environment switch SSR1 CVR Lamp regulator UN22 AC fuse PCB TP2 Upper fix
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Output from the DC Driver PCB (2/15) DC driver PCB Drum motor Laser scanner motor Main motor Fixing motor Primary charging wire cleaning motor Cleaner blade reciprocating motor Transfer drum cleaner brush Polishing roller motor M2 M3 M4 M5 J722 J373 -7 -9 -8 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 J1026 -A7 -A5 -A6 -A8 -A9 -A10 -A11 -A12 -A13 +5V DRMCLK DRMCW DRMSP1 DRMSP0 DRMFG DRMRDY DRMON See p. 2-12. LSMRDY LSMON LSMSEL LSMCLK See p. 5-6.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (3/15) (CLC1120/1130) DC diver PCB Hopper motor M10 Cassette 1 lifter motor Cassette 2 lifter motor Cassette 3 lifter motor (CLC1130 only) J361 -4 -3 -2 -1 J1021 -A10 HOPMCW -A11 HOPMLK -A12 HOPMON -A13 J671 When supplying toner, '0'; when stirring toner, '1'. In response to an error, returns '0' to the PCB. When '1', M10 turns on. M11 J605 -2 -1 J1020 -A1 C1LFMON When '1', M1 turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (4/15) (CLC1150 only) DC driver PCB Hopper motor M10 Cassette 1 lifter motor Cassette 2 lifter motor Duplexing motor J1021 -A10 HOPMCW -A11 HOPMLK -A12 HOPMON -A13 J671 J361 -4 -3 -2 -1 When supplying toner, '0'; when stirring toner, '1'. In response to an error, returns '0' to the PCB. When '1', M10 turns on. DM12 J609 -2 -1 J1019 -B4 D1LFMON When '1', DM12 turns on. -B5 DM13 J613 -2 -1 J1018 -B4 D2LFMON When '1', DM13 turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (5/15) DC driver PCB M developing assembly locking motor C developing assembly locking motor Y developing assembly locking motor Bk developing assembly locking motor PM1 PM2 PM3 PM4 Developing assembly locking driver J332 J591J585J333 PCB -B2 -6 -7 -B3 -9 -4 -B5 -3 -10 -B6 -1 -12 -B8 Transfer drum cleaner locking motor PM7 While PM2 is rotating, alternates between '1' and '0' for CW/CCW rotation. (pulse signal) When '1', on hold.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (6/15) (CLC1120/1130) DC driver PCB Registration path driver PCB Pre-registration motor 2 Pre-registration motor 1 J313 -6 -4 -3 -1 PM8 J314 -6 -4 -3 -1 PM9 J311 -A3 -A4 -A5 -A6 -A8 J1013 -A15 -A14 -A13 -A12 -A10 PRM2A PRM2A* PRM2B PRM2B* PRM2HL While PM8 is rotating, alternates between '1' and '0'.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (7/15) (CLC1150 only) DC driver PCB Registration path driver PCB Pre-registration motor 2 Pre-registration motor 1 J311 -A3 -A4 -A5 -A6 -A8 J1013 -A15 -A14 -A13 -A12 -A10 PRM2A PRM2A* PRM2B PRM2B* PRM2HL While PM8 is rotating, alternates between '1' and '0'. (pulse signal) When '1', on hold. -A9 -A10 -A12 -A13 -A14 -A9 -A8 -A6 -A5 -A4 PRM1A PRM1A* PRM1B PRM1B* PRM1HL While PM9 is rotating, alternates between '1' and '0'.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (8/15) DC driver PCB Developing locking driver PCB M developing cylinder clutch C developing cylinder clutch Y developing cylinder clutch Bk developing cylinder clutch M toner supply clutch C toner supply clutch Y toner supply clutch Bk toner supply clutch CL1 CL2 CL3 CL4 J595 J587 J335 +24V -5 -2 -6 -1 J596 -2 -1 J597 -2 -1 J594 -2 -1 CL5 J672 -2 -1 CL6 J673 -2 -1 CL7 J674 -2 -1 CL8 J675 -2 -1 J332 -B9 J1016 -B4 MDEVCL Wh
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (9/15) (CLC1120/1130) DC driver PCB Registration path driver PCB Registration clutch J555 -2 -1 CL9 J312 +24V -A3 -A4 J311 -A16 J1013 -A2 REGCL * J341 -B13 J1017 -B6 MFFDCL When '1', CL10 turns on. J342 -9 J1019 -A3 C1PUCL When '1', CL11 turns on. J341 -A9 J1017 -A10 C2PUCL When '1', CL12 turns on. J344 -9 J1018 -A8 C3PUCL When '1', CL13 turns on. When '0', CL9 turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (10/15) (CLC1150 only) DC driver PCB Registration path driver PCB Registration clutch CL9 J555 -2 -1 J312 +24V -A3 -A4 J311 -A16 J1013 -A2 REGCL * J341 -B13 J1017 -B6 MFFDCL When '1', CL10 turns on. J341 -A9 J1017 -A10 D1PUCL When '1', DCL12 turns on. J344 -9 J1018 -A8 When '1', DCL13 turns on. When '0', CL9 turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (11/15) DC driver PCB Pickup driver PCB Multifeeder pickup clutch CL16 Postcard feeder clutch (100V model only) Delivery vertical path roller clutch (CLC1150 only) CL18 CL19 J633 J645 J345 -B11 -2 -B12 -1 +24V J341 J1017 -B12 -B7 J1026 -A14 -A15 J725 -2 -1 J708 -3 -1 J701 When '1', CL16 turns on. MFPUCL +24V PCFDCL When '0', CL18 turns on. DVERPCL When '0', CL19 turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (12/15) (CLC1120/1130) DC driver PCB Upper fixing cleaning belt solenoid Lower fixing cleaning belt solenoid SL1 SL2 J501 -1 -2 J1004 -A8 -A7 J500 +24V UWEBSL When '1', SL1 turns on. LWEBSL When '1', SL2 turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (13/15) (CLC1150 only) DC driver PCB Upper fixing cleaning belt solenoid Lower fixing cleaning belt solenoid SL1 SL2 J501 -1 -2 J500 J1004 -A8 -A7 +24V UWEBSL When '0', SL1 turns on. LWEBSL When '0', SL2 turns on. +24V J502 -1 -2 -A6 -A5 Transfer driver PCB Separation push-up solenoid SL3 J582 -2 -1 J322 -A2 -A1 +24V J321 -B1 J1014 -B10 SSPUPSL J311 -B7 J1013 -B11 When '1', SL3 turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (14/15) DC driver PCB Delivery paper detecting plate solenoid (CLC1150 only) SL10 J701 J705 -2 -1 J1029 +24V -8 -9 DELFLSL * When '0', CL10 turns on. J1022 -B4 STCLOSE* -B3 STOPEN* When '0', SL12 turns off. When '0', SL12 turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (15/15) DC driver PCB J407 J404 M developing bias M Y developing bias Y -1 J401 J402 -3 J1001 Developing bias PCB C developing bias C Bk developing bias Bk J405 -1 -3 J421 J1012 -B4 to -B13 Primary charging assembly Grid bias Transfer charging assembly Attraction charging assembly Cleaning rear charging assembly Separation charging assembly External static eliminator Internal static eliminator HVT-AC PCB J411 J1012 -A3 to -A13 HVT-DC
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM This chapter explains the operations and functions of the copier’s drive and original detecting mechanisms, and provides an outline of the timing at which various associated parts are driven. I. II. OPERATION................................3-1 A. Outline ....................................3-1 B. Basic Sequence of Operations..............................3-2 SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM .......3-4 A. Controlling the Scanner Motor ......................................3-4 B.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM I. OPERATION A. Outline Figure 3-101 shows a cross section of the original exposure system, and Figure 3-102 shows an external view. Item Description Number of scans 4 scans max. (full color) Scanner motor (PM15) The motor is a 5-phase stepping motor used to drive the scanner. Its direction of rotation changes when moving the scanner forward and in reverse, while its speed of rotation changes according to the selected reproduction ratio.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM Scanner motor (PM15) No. 2 mirror mount (forward) No. 1 mirror mount Signal plate Scanner home position sensor (PS1) Figure 3-102 B. Basic Sequence of Operations 1.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2. Scanner Home Position Sensor and Operation Scanner motor Operation Forward In reverse Switches to forward movement. Original scanner home position sensor (PS1; SCHP) Moves 2 mm in reverse, and stops. (The point at which it stops is the home position.) Table 3-102 The scanner home position sensor turns on only at the following timing: · At the end of WMUP after power-on. · At the end of pre-scanning. · At the end of all scanning for the specified number of copies.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM II. SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM A. Controlling the Scanner Motor 1. Outline The circuit shown in Figure 3-201 is the circuit used to control the scanner motor (PM15), and has the following functions. 1. Controlling the direction of rotation of the scanner motor. 2. Controlling the direction of rotation of the scanner motor.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2. Operations The CPU (IC8) on the scanner motor driver PCB sends drive pulses to the motor according to the scanning mode and distance and the selected reproduction ratio communicated by the CPU PCB to control the rotation and speed of the motor. To rotate the motor at a high speed when moving the scanner forward and in reverse, the motor drive power is switched from 8 V (forward) to 40 V (reverse).
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM III. CONTROLLING THE INTENSITY OF THE SCANNING LAMP A. Outline Figure 3-301 shows the circuit that controls the intensity of the scanning lamp (LA2), and has the following functions: 1. Turning on/off the scanning lamp. 2. Finds out whether the scanning lamp is on or not. 3. Controls the intensity of the scanning lamp (so as to keep the intensity to a specific level against fluctuations in power voltage).
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM B. Operations 1. Turning On/Off the Scanning Lamp When LAON=0, the lamp regulator drive circuit and the intensity control circuit turn off, causing the lamp to turn off. When LAON=1, the lamp regulator drive circuit and the intensity control circuit turn on, causing the lamp to turn on. 2.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM IV. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier’s parts while keeping the following in mind: 1. Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work. 2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM A. Original Exposure System [1] [4] [3] 1. 1) 2) 3) 4) Removing the Scanning Lamp Remove the vertical side plate. Remove the copyboard glass. Remove the standard white plate cover. Remove the screw [1], and detach the right stay [2]. 5) Remove the three screws [3], and detach the anti-reflection plate [4]. [2] [1] [3] [3] Figure 3-401 6) Shift the scanning lamp to where the right stay [2] was found.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Standard White Plate Remove the vertical size plate. Remove the copyboard glass. Remove the two screws [1], and detach the standard white plate cover [2]. [2] [1] Figure 3-404 [5] 4) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the left stay [4]. 5) Remove the two screws [5], and detach the standard white plate [6]. [3] [7] [4] [6] [3] [5] Figure 3-405 Caution: Mount the standard white plate [a] as shown, i.e., its cut-off [b] is toward the front [c].
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM B. Scanner Drive Assembly [2] [2] 1. Removing the Scanner Drive Motor 1) Remove the rear cover and the rear upper cover; then, detach the flywheel. 2) Remove the primary charging assembly fan. 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the four screws [2]; then, detach the scanner drive motor [3] together with its support plate. 4) Remove the two screws, and detach the scanner drive motor from the support plate. [3] [1] Figure 3-407 2.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 5) Remove the rear cover and the rear upper cover. 6) Remove the upper cover. 7) Remove the left stay [1] and the standard white plate [2]; then, detach the right stay [3]. [3] [2] [1] Figure 3-408 Caution: Mount the standard white plate [a] so that its cut-off [b] is toward the front [c]. [b] [a] [c] Figure 3-409 [4] [5] 8) Remove the flywheel. 9) Remove the original exposure cooling fan 1.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 11) Move the No. 2 mirror mount so that the pulley shaft [6] of the No. 2 mirror mount is visible through the long hole in the side plate. [6] Figure 3-411 Front of the Copier [6] Figure 3-412 Rear of the Copier [7] 12) Fit the binding screw (M4x8) [7] to the pulley shaft, and temporarily secure the pulley to the side plate (front, rear) in place, thereby temporarily securing the No. 2 mirror mount in place. [7] Figure 3-413 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 13) Engage the scanner cable on the pulley and hooks as shown. Caution: · Take care not to damage the cable by the edge of the metal plate. · Keep the four screws [8] loose during the work. 1 2 3 5,8 [8] 4 6 [8] Figure 3-414 14) Remove the screw [7] fitted in step 12). (both front and rear) 15) Loosen the screw on the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3040-000), and extend the arm [9] fully. [9] Figure 3-415 3-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 16) Fit the mirror positioning tool [10] between the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2 mirror mount, and insert the pin [11] that comes with the mirror positioning tool. [10] [11] Figure 3-416 [10] [11] Figure 3-417 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 17) Secure the metal fixing [12] of the scanner cable to the No. 1 mirror mount with two screws [13] through the angle hole in the side plate. [12] [13] Figure 3-418 [12] [13] Figure 3-419 18) Detach the mirror positioning tool. 19) When all work is done, move the No. 1 mirror mount by hand (as if to make about 10 A3 full scans), thereby adapting the cable to the pulley and the hooks. Then, fully tighten the four screws [8] that have been kept loose.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM This chapter explains the operations and functions of the copier’s image processing mechanisms, and provides an outline of the timing at which various associated parts are driven. I. II. III. IV. OUTLINE .....................................4-1 CCD/CCD DRIVE........................4-2 A. Controlling the CCD ...............4-2 B. CCD Driver Circuit .................4-2 ANALOG IMAGE PROCESSING ............................4-3 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING ........................
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM I. OUTLINE Table 4-101 shows the major functions of the image processing system. Item Description CCD/CCD driver PCB Converts (photo conversion) light reflected by an original into electrical signals. Analog processor PCB Performs analog image processing (odd-/even-number bit integration, BGR level matching, A/D conversion). Image processor PCB Performs digital image processing (shading, YMCBk conversion, various image processing). Table 4-101 Scanning lamp No.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM II. CCD/CCD DRIVE A. Controlling the CCD Table 4-201 shows the major specifications of the CCD. Item Specifications Number of CCD lines 3 lines (GBR) Number of CCD pixels 5000 pixels/line Output system 2 channels (odd-/even-number) Table 4-201 B. CCD Driver Circuit The CCD driver reduces the impedance of image signals from CCD in its buffer (impedance reduction circuit), and sends the result to the analog processor PCB.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM III. ANALOG IMAGE PROCESSING The analog processor circuit performs the following on the output of the CCD: Item Description BGR level matching The levels of the B, G, and R signals are matched to suit the B, G, and R offset signals to correct the rate of efficiency of photo conversion (for B, G, and R).
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM IV. DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING A. Outline The copier uses the PCBs shown in Table 4-401 to perform digital image processing, and all these PCBs are collectively referred to as the “image processor”. The B, G, and R image signals from the analog image processing block are converted into Y, M, C, and Bk image signals in the digital image processing block. At the same time, each data unit is converted for image processing selected on the control panel.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM IP-MAIN PCB Original position detection IPPRJ PCB Analog processor PCB CCD Black and edge/ line width detection R R Shading correction G B G B UCR R 3-lineCCD position matching Sensor color correction Chromatic space correction IP-ECO Direct G mapping B B IP-ECO PCB A UCR R G B Logar- C ithmic M correcY tion Toner color correction Coloring/ contouring Density processing Enlargement/ reduction Slanting Anticounterfeit processing Sharpness/ filter pro
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM B. Shading Correction The output of the CCD will not necessarily be uniform even if the light it receives is from an original of even density. To make up for any discrepancy, shading correction is performed and the data (collected while scanning an original) is corrected to generate data representing uniform light distribution.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM C. 3-Line CCD Position Matching Circuit The copier’s CCD consists of three lines and, as such, signals resulting from a line image scanned by the scanner at a single point will reach the CCD with a discrepancy (about 0.38 mm in relation to the copyboard glass; equivalent of 6 lines). To correct such a discrepancy, the 3-line CCD position matching circuit temporarily stores the R and B image signals in a line memory for output together with the G image signal.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM E. Original Position Detection Circuit The original position detection circuit is used to find out the size and position of an original on the copyboard. It identifies an original as being a rectangle (or a square) possessing coordinates X1/Y1 and X2/Y2 found on the ends of a diagonal line.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM F. Black Detection Circuit and Edge/Line Width Detection Circuit The black detection and edge/line width detection circuits perform the following image processing using RGR signals: 1. Black Detection Identifies the color of the pixel in question, and generates its color code. 2. Edge Detection Detects whether the pixel in question is the edge of an input image or not. 3. Line Width Detection Detects the width of the line forming the edge of an input image.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM G. Chromatic Space Correction Circuit The chromatic space correction circuit is used to improve on the reproduction of color for the printer unit. The range of color reproduction for photo and computer-generated images is wider than the range of color reproduction possible by the printer unit, leading to discrepancies in gradation between the original and its output image.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM I. Logarithmic Correction and BGR-to-YMC Conversion a. Logarithmic Correction The output of the CCD possesses linear characteristics in relation to the intensity of light reflected by an original. The density as perceived by the eye, however, does not necessarily have linear characteristics. To compensate for the discrepancy, the copier performs level conversion as shown in Figure 4408. b.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM J. Toner Color Correction Circuit Ideally, each color toner should absorb 100% of light of specific wavelengths and reflect light of all other wavelengths. In reality, however, areas indicated by a, b, and c in Figure 4-410 exist, requiring color correction on reflection characteristics by a color correction circuit. The Bk signal is generated from the UCR signal while correction takes place. Light reflected by toner a c b Wavelength (nm) (nm) Figure 4-410 K.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM L. Density Processing The correction curve used for density processing is varied according to the following parameters: a. b. c. d. e.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 3. 4. 5. Shift a. Center b. Left/right bind c. Free shift Mirror Image Image Repeat N. Sharpness/Filter Processing Sharpness/filter processing is arithmetic processing performed to generate sharp or soft images according to the settings selected on the control panel (copying mode, sharpness strong/weak). When “sharpness weak” is selected, the changes in image density are evened out to produce “soft” images.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM P. CMYBk/RGB Integration The CMYBk integration block and the RGB integration block perform the following processing according to the instructions entered on the control panel or the editor: · Transparency synthesis · Gradation processing The YMCK or RGB image data from an external device (IPU) and the CMYBk or RGB image data read by the scanner unit are integrated according to the ratio of composition selected on the control panel or the editor. Q.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM V. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier’s parts while keeping the following in mind: 1. Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work. 2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM A. Electrical Parts [1] [2] [1] 1. Removing the CCD Unit 1) Disconnect the power plug. 2) Remove the copyboard glass. 3) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the lens mount cover [2]. Figure 4-501 [5] 4) Remove the nine screws [3], and detach the laser unit cover (front) [4]. (200V model only) 5) Remove the two screws [5], and detach the laser unit cover (rear) [6].
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 2. Removing the Analog Processor PCB 1) Remove the copyboard glass, and detach the lens mount cover. 2) Remove the laser unit cover (front) and the laser unit cover (rear). (200V model only) 3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the auxiliary cover [2]. 4) Remove the four screws [3], and detach the laser scanner cover [4]. [3] [3] [4] [1] Caution: Move the mirror mount fully to the left. Take care not to damage the power supply line [5] of the scanning lamp.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 3. Removing the Image Processor PCB (IP-MAIN, IP-ED, IF, IP-ECO) 1) Remove the delivery upper cover. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the image processor PCB cover [2]. [1] [2] Figure 4-508 3) If the IP-ED or IF PCB is installed, remove the two screws [3] and detach the interface harness trainer [4]. (You need not perform this step when removing the IP-ECO.
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM This chapter explains the operations and functions of the copier’s laser exposure system, and provides an outline of the timing at which various associated parts are driven. I. II. III. OPERATIONS .............................5-1 A. Functions................................5-1 B. Sequence of Operations (laser exposure system) .........5-2 GENERATING THE BD SIGNAL .......................................5-3 LASER DRIVER CIRCUIT ..........5-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. IV.
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM I. OPERATIONS A.
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM The major items of control and functions of the laser exposure system are as follows: 1. Laser Exposure System Control Optimum intensity control to suit the surface potential of the drum 2. Laser Scanning Method Beam spot scanning 3. Synchronization Control By the BD signal in main scanning direction By the ITOP signal in sub scanning direction 4. Laser Scanner Control Constant rotation speed B.
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM II. GENERATING THE BD SIGNAL The BD signal is used to enable synchronization in main scanning direction, and it is generated by the BD PCB based on the laser beam reflected by the BD mirror found in the optical path. The BD signal is used to send video signals from the image processor PCB to the laser controller PCB.
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM III. LASER DRIVER CIRCUIT A. Controlling the Laser System The laser driver circuit converts video signals (VD0 to VD7) into laser intensity control signals used to drive the semiconductor laser. The laser driver circuit has the following functions: 1. Controlling laser emission. 2. Controlling the laser intensity (APC control). 3. Switching laser outputs. Each of the signals has the following function: 1.
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 4. APCHOLD (auto output control signal) Serves as a control signal used to stabilize the output of the laser. 5. L-ON (laser activation signal) Serves to turn on the laser at full intensity; it is ‘1’ (laser on) only during laser power adjustment or during beam detection. 6. L-RDY (laser emission ready signal) Serves to indicate the state of the laser; it is ‘0’ when the laser is on, and is ‘1’ when the laser is off.
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM IV. LASER SCANNER MOTOR The laser scanner motor (M3) starts to rotate at a specific speed when the DC driver PCB causes the laser scanner motor drive signal (LSMON) to go ‘0’.
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM V. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier’s parts while keeping the following in mind: 1. Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work. 2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM A. Electrical Parts 1. Removing the Original Scanner Motor Driver PCB 1) Remove the copyboard glass, and detach the lens mount cover. 2) Remove the laser scanner cover. (See the instructions on how to remove the analog processor PCB.) 3) Remove the nine screws [1], and detach the laser unit cover (front) [2]. (200V model only) 4) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the laser unit cover (rear) [4].
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 4) Remove the CCD unit. 5) Disconnect the connector [1] from the original scanner motor driver. [1] Figure 5-503 6) Disconnect the five connectors [2], and remove the two screws [3]; then, remove the metal fixing [4]. [2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [4] [3] Figure 5-504 7) Remove the four screws [5] (M4x12), and detach the laser scanner unit [6].
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM [2] 3. Removing the Laser Controller PCB/Laser Driver PCB [3] [2] Caution: The laser controller PCB and the laser driver PCB are adjusted to a high accuracy at the factory. If they must be replaced in the field, be sure to replace them as a pair. [2] 1) Remove the laser scanner unit from the copier. 2) Disconnect the three connectors [1], and remove the six screws [2]; then, detach the laser controller PCB [3].
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 5) Remove the three screws [9], and detach the laser driver PCB [10]. [10] [9] [9] Figure 5-509 Caution: When handling the laser driver PCB, be sure to hold it as shown, and never touch any of the elements on the PCB. Take special care not to touch the pins of the laser; otherwise, you can damage the laser by static electricity. Figure 5-510 4.
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 1) Turn off the power switch. 2) Remove the copyboard glass, and detach the lens mount cover. 3) Remove the laser scanner cover. 4) Turn on the power switch. 5) Open the left front cover. (Be sure that the left front cover will not close.) 6) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the left inside cover [2]. [2] [1] [1] Figure 5-511 7) Remove the screw [3], and detach the laser power checker slot cover [4].
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 13) Compare the reading and the value (Pmax) recorded on the label. If different, turn VR2 [7] on the laser driver PCB so that the reading and the recorded value are identical. Caution: 1. While watching the reading of the laser power checker, turn VR2 gradually, taking care not to increase the power in excess. (Turning VR2 counterclockwise reduces the laser output.) 2. The laser diode is vulnerable. Be sure NOT to exceed the value recorded on the label. 3.
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2) Select T-V00, enter ‘255’, and press the ON key. 3) Select T-V00-ON, and press the OK key (so as to turn on the laser). Record the value (offset value) indicated. To stop the laser output, press the Stop key. 4) Select T-V00, and adjust its value so that it is as shown: offset value + (0.15 to 0.20 mV) 5) Likewise, adjust the following according to their respective values recorded on the label: T-VFF, P3-V00, P3-VFF-1, P3VFF-2, P3-VFF-3, P3-VFF-4.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM This chapter explains the operations and functions of the copier’s image processing mechanisms and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems, and provides an outline of the timing at which various associated parts are driven. I. II. III. IV. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM ..... 6-1 A. Outline ....................................6-1 B. Controlling the C Sensor ..........................6-3 C. Sequence of Operations (image formation system) ..................
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM I. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM A. Outline The major functions of the image formation system are as follows: Item Description Drum surface potential control 1. Setting the voltage of the primary charging assembly grid bias. 2. Setting the voltage of the developing bias (Vg). 3. Measuring the dark area attenuation potential. Primary charging assembly grid bias control Using DC constant voltage control (setting by potential control).
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Figure 6-101 shows the components of the image formation system.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM B. Controlling the C Sensor The copier is equipped with a C sensor (PS4) to control the timing at which the transfer output and internal/external static eliminator output is generated, thereby enabling increases in copying speed. The sensor is found inside the transfer drum, and is used to control the timing of high-voltage output in relation to the position of copy paper.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM b. State of the Transfer Drum and the Signal Plate C Copy paper (side B) Transfer blade Transfer drum PCB DC driver PCB HVT-DC/HVTAC PCB Internal/external static eliminator C sensor (PS4) Copy paper (side A) Signal plate C Figure 6-103 6-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Related Error Code E071: ITOP sensor error Error description Detail code F000 The signal from the sensor is not detected for 10 sec after the start of transfer drum engagement. 0001 The sequence of signals (falling edge) from the signal plate detected by the side B sensor is not correct. 0002 The sequence of signals (rising edge) from the signal plate detected by the side B sensor is wrong.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM E071: ITOP sensor error Error description Detail code 1102 The signal of the side B sensor (rising edge) is generated 0.3 sec earlier than normal after the signal of the SP-C (rising edge) has been generated. 1103 The signal of the SP-C (rising edge) is generated 0.3 sec earlier than normal after the signal of the side B sensor (falling edge) has been generated. 1104 The signal of the SP-C (falling edge) is generated 0.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM C.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM II. IMAGE STABILIZATION A. Outline The image stabilization mechanism has the following items of control: 1. Determining the grid bias. 2. Determining the developing bias. 3. Determining the laser output.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM The image stabilization mechanism operates as follows: Power On Controls the surface potential of the drum. Measures the dark area potential attenuation. Determines the contrast potential using the environment sensor. Determines and controls the grid bias and developing bias. Standby Copy Start Key On Determines the contrast potential using the environment sensor. Determines and controls the grid bias and developing bias.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM B. Controlling the Surface Potential of the Drum 1. Outline The surface potential of the drum is controlled for the following to determine the grid bias and developing bias of the primary charging assembly: · When the power switch is turned on while the temperature of the fixing roller is 130°C or less. (drum surface potential control and dark area potential attenuation measurement) · During last rotation for each copying run.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3. Measuring the Dark Area Potential Attenuation The operation referred to as “dark area potential attenuation measurement” consists in measuring the rate of attenuation to prevent fogging and carrier adhesion. (The potential created on the photosensitive drum by primary charging tends to decrease if left alone in a dark area.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5. Setting the Grid Bias and the Developing Bias The grid bias and the developing bias DC component are determined using Vd/VL values, dark area potential attenuation value, and target contrast potential value.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 6.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7. Auto Gradation Correction in User Mode a. Outline The copier’s auto gradation correction is designed to produce ideal gradation in images. A 64-gradation halftone image (for each color) is printed in user mode, and the density of the output is read by the CCD of the reader unit for the following control: · Correcting the laser output. · Correcting gradation b. Operations For instructions on how to operate user mode, see Chapter 1.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Related Error Code E061 E061 is an error code associated with the mechanism controlling the surface potential of the drum, and points to the following: (The notation “xx” of detail code indicates the color of the developing assembly; e.g., xx=01: M, xx=02: Y, xx=03: Y, xx=04: Bk.) Check Detail code Potential sensor 0000 0001 Description Possible cause Vd/VL before offset is -10 V or less. The offset value is other than 100 ±50. The potential sensor is faulty.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM E061 Check Detail code Description Dark area potential attenuation limit 0060 The dark area potential attenuation value is 150 V or more. Control limit 0070 The grid bias output is -900 V or more. The developing bias output is -100 V or less. The developing bias output is 700 V or more. The developing bias output is 200 V or less. The grid bias upper limit is reached. The grid bias lower limit is reached. The developing bias upper limit is reached.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM III. CONTROLLING THE CHARGING MECHANISM A. Controlling the Primary Charging Mechanism and the Grid Bias 1. Operation The mechanism used to control the primary charging/grid bias of the primary charging assembly has the following items of control: 1. Controlling primary charging to a constant current. 2. Controlling the grid bias to a constant voltage. 2. Protection Circuit The overcurrent detection circuit is used as a grid bias protection circuit.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM B. Controlling the Developing Bias 1. Operation The developing bias control mechanism has the following items of control: 1. Controlling the developing bias AC component to a constant voltage. 2. Controlling the developing bias DC component to a constant voltage.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM [2] Turning On/Off the Double Blank Pulses When DBBPC1 (M, Y)/DBBPC2 (C, Bk) is ‘1’, double blank pulses are generated. [3] Turning On/Off the DC Bias When DBDCC1 (M, Y)/DBDCC2 (C, Bk) is ‘1’, the DC bias output is ready for generation. [4] Controlling the Application Voltage Level of the DC Bias DBDCI1 (M, Y)/DBDCI2 (C, Bk) is controlled to +8 to +16 V; a DC bias is generated at +16 V or less. (DBDCI1 and DBDCI2 are controlled using the data from potential control.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM C. Controlling the Attraction Charging Mechanism and Transfer Charging Current 1. Operations The attraction charging / transfer charging mechanism has the following items of control: 1. The attraction charging mechanism is controlled to a contact current. 2. The transfer charging mechanism is controlled to a constant current. 3. The current is controlled to suit the type of copy paper and the reading of the environment sensor.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM D. Controlling the Separation Charging Current 1. Operation The separation charging control mechanism has the following items of control: 1. Controlling the separation charging DC component to a constant current. 2. Controlling the separation charging AC component to a constant voltage. 3. Controlling the current and the voltage to suit the type of copy paper and the reading from the environment sensor.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Related Error Code E067 The AC-ERR signal goes ‘0’ when any of the following errors occurs in the separation charging circuit or the external/internal static eliminator circuit of the HVT-AC circuit: 1. The separation DC/AC high-voltage output is absent. 2. The external/internal static eliminator AC high-voltage output is absent. 3. The internal static eliminator DC high-voltage output is absent. 4.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM E. Controlling the External/Internal Static Eliminating Current 1. Operation The external/internal static eliminating control mechanism has the following items of control: 1. Controlling the static eliminating current to a specific level. 2. Turning on/off the high-voltage output.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM F. Controlling the Post-Cleaning Charging Current 1. Operations The post-cleaning charging mechanism has the following items of control: 1. Controlling the static eliminating charge to a constant current level. Each of the signals is used for the following: [1] HVCC (post-cleaning charge ON/OFF control signal) When ‘1’, the high-voltage output is ready.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM G. Controlling the Temperature of the Photosensitive Drum 1. Control The photosensitive drum temperature control mechanism has the following items of control: Item Description Drum heater 60W Temperature measurement By thermistor (TH) Reference temperature 41°C Error temperature 109°C Table 6-301 When the error temperature is reached, the control IC turns on to shut off the power to the drum heater. 2.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Each of the signals is used for the following: [1] SHUTOFF* It goes ‘0’ when the CPU PCB detects an error (e.g., fault in the fixing heater), thereby turning off the main switch to cut off the power to the power supply PCB. [2] DRHOFF When other heaters are on, it goes ‘1’ to cut off the power to the drum heater and the cassette heater, thereby reducing power consumption.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM H. Controlling the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Mechanism 1. Operations The primary charging wire is cleaned by moving the charging wire cleaner back and forth. The charging wire cleaner takes about 12 sec to move forward and about 12 sec to move in reverse, moving forward when PRIMFW is ‘1’ and PRIMRV is ‘0’, while moving in reverse when PRIMFW is ‘0’ and PRIMRV is ‘1’. 2. Conditions for Operation 1.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM IV. DEVELOPING ASSEMBLIES A. Outline The developing assemblies are subject to the following items of control: 1. Locking/unlocking the assembly. 2. Controlling the concentration of color toner. 3. Controlling the concentration of black toner. 4. Controlling the supply of toner.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM B. Locking the Developing Assembly When the developing assembly locking motor (PM1 through PM4) turns on, the developing assembly locking cam starts to rotate to lock the developing assembly to the photosensitive drum. Figure 6-402 shows the cyan developing assembly in its locked state. When making a 4-color copy, locking will be M, C, Y, and Bk in sequence.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Related Error Code E021 This error code is indicated in response to any of the following errors (they are used to monitor the developing assembly home position). 6-30 Detail code Error 0100 The M developing assembly HP sensor does not turn on. 0200 The C developing assembly HP sensor does not turn on. 0300 The Y developing assembly HP sensor does not turn on. 0400 The Bk developing assembly HP sensor does not turn on.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM C. Controlling the Concentration of Color Toner 1. Outline To determine the length of time for color toner supply operation, the concentration of color toner on the developing cylinder is measured, thereby computing the change in toner density. Then, the density of the sample image on the photosensitive drum is measured to detect the change in toner density on the photosensitive drum.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Reference: The copier’s toner reflects near infrared light, while the carrier (iron particles) of its developer absorbs near infrared light. In other words, the near infrared reflected by the developer decreases as the amount of toner in the developer decreases. Be sure to execute FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-M/C/Y in service mode at time of installation or when the developer has been replaced or the toner concentration sensor has been replaced.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4. Sequence of Measurement The concentration of color toner is measured during copying operation to determine the amount of toner to supply. Patch detection, for which the Bk toner sensor is used, is performed after 20 copying operations regardless of the selected copying mode or copying size.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM D. Controlling the Concentration of Black Toner 1. Outline The concentration of black toner is measured, the density of the sample image on the photosensitive drum is measured, and the change in toner concentration is computed to determine the amount of black toner to supply (in terms of a length of time). The amount of toner supplied by the hopper is controlled to suit the change in toner concentration detected this way.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM The following is the flow of operations used to control the concentration of black toner: Copy Start key ON for every copy Measures the concentration of black copies. Determines the amount of black toner to supply according to the change in concentration. 3.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Each item of measurement data may be checked in service mode as follows: Item Description Adjustment value SGNL-K SGNL-D Bk toner concentration signal (Bk-SGNL) 375±35 614±21 REF-K REF-D Bk reference signal (Bk-REF) 818±41 818±41 Table6-405 Reference: Unlike Y, M, or C toner, the copier’s black toner absorbs near infrared light. As such, the amount of black toner inside the developer cannot be detected by shining near infrared light to the developer.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM When measuring the concentration of black toner during copying operation, it is necessary to prerent adhesion of toner on the photosensitive drum to the transfer sheet. To prevent such a problem, the CPU PCB controls the timing at which the laser is turned on so that the black toner image will come face-to-face with the metal transfer sheet.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5. Sequence of Operations (measurement) Patch detection using the Bk toner sensor to determine the amount of toner to supply is executed for each copy as follows: 1. When copying on side B, a patch is formed in the area that faces the linking plate along the trailing edge of the image. 2. When copying on side B, a patch is formed in the area that faces the linking plate along the leading edge of the image.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 6. Error Code (E020) Related to Control of Toner Concentration ‘E020’ is used to indicate a fault associated with the concentration of toner. ATR control uses different methods for Bk and M/C/Y, and the following two types of control are performed for each: 1. Controlling the concentration of toner to the initial setting at time of installation and replacement of developer. 2.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM b. Flow of initial setting control using the black toner concentration sensor and its related detail code (at time of replacement of developer) (The notation “xx” in detail code indicates the color of the developing assembly; i.e., xx=02: C, xx=03: Y, xx=04: Bk.) Initial settings Flow of operation 1. Feeding developer Feeds developer to the developing assembly. (FUNCTION>INSTALL> SPLY-K) 2. Stirring Stirs the developer inside the developing assembly.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Initial settings 3.5 End/ reading once again Detail code Flow of operation Ends the operation if the measurement of SGNLK is as indicated; otherwise, goes to 3.4 “Reading SGNL-M/C/Y/ K, REF-M/C/Y/K.” Items of detection XX14 The level of variation in one sample of SGNL-xx is 51 or higher. XX16 The level of variation in 16 sample of SGNL-xx is 102 or higher. 0424 The initial value is 305 or lower. 0434 The initial value is 371 or higher.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM c. Flow of Initial Setting Control Using the Color Toner Concentration Sensor and Its Related Detail Code (at time of replacement of developer) (The notation “xx” in detail code indicates the color of the developing assembly; i.e., xx=02: C, xx=03: Y) Initial setting 1. Feeding developer 2. Stirring 3. Reading initial value 3.1 Idle rotation (30 sec) 3.2 Reading reference signal REFM/C/Y Flow of operation Feeds developer to the developing assembly.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM d. Flow of Control Using the Black Toner Concentration Sensor at Power-On and Its Related Detail Code Flow at power-on Flow of operation Detail code Item of detection 1. Turning on the power switch 2. Detecting dirt on window (during initial rotation) 2.1Reading SGNK-D Black tone sensor LED on; uses PS1 and PS2 to check light; converts light into voltage. 2.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM e. Flow of Control Using the Black Toner Concentration Sensor during Copying Operation and Its Relate Detail Code Flow at power-on 1. Starting copying operation Flow of operation 3. Detecting dirt on the window (during initial rotation) 4. Forming a Forms a patch in the area coming face-to-face against the linking plate of the transfer drum. 5. Measuring concentration The density of the patch is measured. 5.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Flow at power-on 5.3 Reading SGNL-K 5.4 Making a comparison and computation Flow of operation Detail code LED on; uses PS1 to check light; converts light into voltage. xx92 Compares the initial setting SGNL-xx and SGNL-K read in 5.3. Item of detection xxA4 The level of variation to one sample is 102 or nigher. The reading is 51 or lower. 04B2 The reading is 550 or higher. xxB2 The reading is 1020 or higher. 0463 The initial setting is 305 or lower.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM f. Flow of Control Using the Color Toner Concentration Sensor during Copying Operation and Its Related Code (The notation “xx” of detail code indicates the color of developing assembly; e.g., xx=01: M, xx=02: Y, xx=03: Y) Initial setting 1. Starting copying operation 2. Checking the connector (disconnection) 3. Measuring the concentration 3.1 Reading REF- M/C/Y 3.2 Making a comparison and computation 3.3 Reading SGNL-M/C/Y 3.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM E. Supplying Toner The copier is equipped with four hoppers (M, C, Y, and Bk), each one operating when its respective toner supply clutch turns on to supply the respective developing assembly with toner.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM V. PHOTOSENSITIVE DRUM CLEANER ASSEMBLY A. Outline The major functions of the photosensitive drum cleaner assembly are as follows: 1. Controlling the reciprocating mechanism of the cleaning blade. 2. Controlling the collection of waste toner.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM B. Controlling the Reciprocating Mechanism of the Cleaning Blade The reciprocating mechanism for the cleaning blade is turned on for the following: 1. To remove foreign matter (paper lint) clogging the gap between the cleaning blade and the photosensitive drum. 2. Reducing adhesion of toner on the cleaning blade or the photosensitive drum. Item Description Reciprocating stroke Moves from the center to the left/right 2 mm (distance of 4 mm).
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2. Detecting a Waste Toner Feedscrew Lock Condition If the waste toner feedscrew is prevented from rotation because of some fault, waste toner could leak from the drum cleaning assembly. To prevent such a problem, the waster toner feedscrew locking switch (SW7) is used to detect a feedscrew lock condition. Related Error Code E013 This error code is indicated when SW7 is pushed by gear A. If the waste toner feedscrew locks, gear A shifts in the detection of the arrow.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM VI. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier’s parts while keeping the following in mind: 1. Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work. 2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM A. Photosensitive Drum Assembly [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] 1. Construction [1] Photosensitive drum cleaner [2] Post-cleaning [3] Pre-exposure lamp [4] Primary charging assembly [5] Photosensitive drum Figure 6-601 2. Removing the Photosensitive Drum 1) Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the power plug. 2) Open the front cover (left, right), and remove the two screws [1]; then, detach the two hopper unit stopper metal fixings. 3) Open the hopper unit fully.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Caution: See to it that the removed developing assembly will remain free of foreign matter. Do not place the developing assembly near the copier and handle the transfer assembly frame or the photosensitive drum frame unit above it. 11) Remove the black toner concentration sensor unit. 12) Remove the screw [5], and detach the photosensitive drum positioning roll [6].
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 14) Place the photosensitive drum unit as shown. Figure 6-607 15) Place copy paper over the photosensitive drum as shown. 16) Remove the screw [10], and remove the fixing pin unit (right) [11]. [10] [11] Figure 6-608 [13] 17) Remove the three screws [12], and remove the photosensitive drum butting block (front) [13]. [12] Figure 6-609 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 18) Remove the threes screws [14], and detach the photosensitive drum butting block (rear) [15]. [15] [14] Figure 6-610 19) Lift the stopper plate [16], and remove the scraper plate [17]. [17] [16] Figure 6-611 20) Avoiding the protrusion [18] on the flange at the rear of the photosensitive drum,, slide out the photosensitive drum unit slowly. [18] Figure 6-612 6-56 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Reference: Hold it as shown for removal, thereby facilitating the work. 21) Place the photosensitive drum unit so that the protrusion on the flange at the rear is at the bottom (i.e., the drum heater friction plate is at the bottom). Figure 6-613 Caution: The photosensitive drum is susceptible to light, and exposure to light for a long time can lead to white spots or black bands on copies.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3) Coat the No. 2 blade of the black toner concentration sensor assembly with drum cleaner lubricant (TKN-0480) in an even layer. 4) Coat the blade of the photosensitive drum cleaner assembly with drum cleaner lubricant (TKN-0480) in an even layer. 5) Dry wipe the sensor window of the black toner concentration sensor assembly, and mount the sensor. Caution: 1. Shake the lubricant well before application. 2.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4. Cleaning the Photosensitive Drum If the surface of the photosensitive drum is soiled, wipe it with a flannel cloth coated with toner. (Do not use paper, lint-free or otherwise.) Caution: Do NOT dry wipe or do NOT clean with solvent. Do NOT use drum cleaning powder. COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5. Removing the Drum Heater 1) Remove the photosensitive drum. 2) Remove the two screws (M4x12) [1], and detach the photosensitive drum flange (front) [2]. [2] [1] Figure 6-615 [4] 3) Disconnect the connector [3], and pull out the drum heater [4]. [3] Figure 6-616 4) Lift off the photosensitive drum as shown. Figure 6-617 6-60 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM [5] Caution: Do not apply grease or the like to the slip ring for the drum heater. In particular, do NOT use conductive grease. If the slip ring friction side [5] has powder, dry wipe it lightly to remove. Do not remove the material (black) that has caked on the slip ring friction side. It serves as lubricant. Figure 6-618 [3] 6. 1) 2) 3) 4) [1] Removing the Drum Heater Brush Remove the rear cover. Remove the flywheel. Remove the drum motor unit.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM C. Charging Assembly 1. Outline The copier has five charging assemblies equipped with charging wires, each of which is 0.06 mm in diameter. 2. Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 1) Open the hopper unit fully. 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the primary charging assembly [3]. [2] [1] [3] Figure 6-621 3. Removing the Grid Plate 1) Remove the primary charging assembly. 2) Remove the screw [1], and remove the grid plate [2].
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4. Replacing the Wire Cleaning Pad of the Primary Charging Assembly 1) Remove the primary charging assembly. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the shielding plate [2]. [1] [2] [1] Figure 6-623 3) Pick the cleaning pad [3] to remove.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5. Removing the Post-Cleaning Charging Assembly 1) Open the hopper unit fully. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the post-cleaning assembly [2]. [1] [2] Figure 6-625 Charging assembly Height of charging wire (mm) Range of adjustment Primary charging assembly 10.5 4 mm (approx.) Separation charging assembly 17.0 6.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM D. Developing Assemblies 1. Construction of the Y/M/C Developing Assembly [1] Developing cylinder [2] ATR sensor [1] [2] Figure 6-627 2. Construction of the Bk Developing Assembly [1] Developing cylinder [1] Figure 6-628 3. Removing the Developing Assembly 1) Open the right front cover. 2) Remove the two screws, and detach the hopper stopper plate; then, open the hopper fully. 3) Remove the Y/M/C developing assembly.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Caution: 1. If you have disconnected a connector when removing the Y/M/C developing assembly, be sure to clean the inside of the ATR sensor connector. 2. When mounting a developing assembly to the copier, be sure to dry wipe its bias electrode with lint-free paper in advance to prevent developing faults. [1] [2] Figure 6-630 [3] 4. Removing the ATR Sensor of the Y/M/C Developing Assembly 1) Remove the Y/M/C developing assembly.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5. Removing the Developing Cylinder Basically, the same steps are performed for removal. The following uses the M developing assembly. 1) Remove the developing assembly. 2) Remove the screw (M3x4) [1], and detach the developing blade cover [2]. [1] [2] Figure 6-634 [3] 3) Remove the four screws (M3x6) [3], and disconnect the connector [4]; then, remove the developing blade unit.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4) Peel off the double-sided adhesive tape from under the gear cover sheet. 5) Remove the three screws [5], and detach the developing assembly lower cover [6]. The screw identified as [5a] is tightened over the white line. [5] [6] [5a] Figure 6-637 6) Remove the resin screw [7] found at the front of the developing assembly, and detach the electrode plate cover [8].
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 8) Remove the grip ring [12], washer [13], butting roll [14], and spacer [15]. Caution: When assembling the part, be sure to leave a gap of 0.2 ±0.1 mm between the roll [4] and the washer [13]. [15] [14] [13] [12] Figure 6-640 9) Remove the E-ring [16], grip ring [17], two gears [18], bearing [19], and sleeve slider [20] at the rear of the developing assembly.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 11) Remove the gear [23]. [23] Figure 6-643 12) Shift the bearings [24] found on both ends of the developing cylinder in the direction of the arrow, and pull off the cylinder [25]. [24] [25] Figure 6-644 Caution: While butting the bearing against the wall X1 of the case, force the sleeve in the direction of Y and mount the grip ring Z1, making sure there is no gap.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 6. Adjusting the S-B Gap If you have replaced the developing blade, make adjustments using the S-B gap gauge (FY9-3044-000). See the following for the SB gap of each sleeve: Developer color S-B gap Yellow 0.62mm Cyan 0.74mm Magenta 0.74mm Black 0.48mm Insert two gauges (see the guide above for each color; on both ends) into the gaps between the developing blade and the sleeve, and secure the developing blade in place.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4) Select FUNCTION>INSTALL in service mode. 5) While keeping the plastic bag against the discharge opening, press RECV-M/C/Y/ K in service mode (selected according to the color of the developer to replace). · When developer stops pouring out, press the Stop key to end the operation. 6) Fit the cap to the discharge opening. 7) Remove the screw, and detach the developing assembly. · To remove the M/Y/C developing assembly, disconnect the connector also.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 15) Pour the developer into the developing assembly. · Try rotating the developer case slowly to avoid spilling. 16) When done, press the Stop key to end the operation. 17) Execute STIR-Y/M/C/K in service mode (according to the color of developer you have replaced; about 2 min each). If you have replaced all four color developers, execute STIR-4. 18) Execute INIT-Y/M/C/K in service mode (according to the color of developer you have replaced; about 2 min).
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM E. Hoppe Assembly [1] 1. Opening the Hopper 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the hopper stopper plate; then, open the hopper fully. Figure 6-653 2. Removing the Hopper Unit 1) Open the hopper. 2) Disconnect the two connectors [1] from the bottom of the hopper unit, and remove the wire saddle. [1] Figure 6-654 3) Hold the hopper unit as shown, and lift it.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3. Removing the Hopper Motor 1) Remove the hopper unit. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the toner receptacle [2]. Caution: If the hopper motor does not rotate or fails to stop, a transistor on the DC driver PCB may be damaged. If such is the case, replace the DC driver PCB. [2] [1] Figure 6-656 3) Remove the two screws [3], and disconnect the two connectors [4]; then, remove the connector mount.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4. Removing the Toner Supply Clutch (The following uses the black hopper.) 1) Remove the hopper unit. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the hopper cover [2]. [1] [2] [1] Figure 6-659 [3] 3) Remove the six screws [3], and detach the hopper upper cover [4]. [3] [3] [4] Figure 6-660 4) Remove the two screws [5], and detach the reinforcing plate [6]. [6] [5] [5] Figure 6-661 6-76 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5) Remove the screw [7], and disconnect the two connectors [8]; then, detach the black hopper. In the case of the magenta hopper, remove the three screws [9]; then, detach the support plate [10] and the drive belt [11] in advance. [8] [7] [9] [10] [11] [9] Figure 6-662 6) Remove the E-ring [12], gear 1 [13], bushing [14], E-ring [15], E-ring [16], and bushing [17], and disconnect the connector [18] of the hopper driver assembly; then, remove the clutch.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM F. Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Assembly 1. Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Unit 1) Open the front door (left, right), and remove the hopper unit stopper metal fixing. 2) Open the hopper unit fully. 3) Loosen the screw [1], and rotate the blade releasing lever [2] clockwise (unlocking direction) until it stops. Then, tighten the screw [1] to secure, and release the photosensitive drum cleaner blade from the photosensitive drum.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Caution: 1. When inserting the photosensitive drum cleaner unit into the copier, be sure to put the cleaner unit in horizontal direction in relation to the copier’s rails, and make sure that it will not slide off the rails. 2. When mounting the photosensitive drum cleaner unit, secure the cleaner unit with a screw [3]; then, turn the blade releasing lever [2] counterclockwise (locking direction), and check to make sure that the screw has been tightened fully. 3.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3. Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Scoop-Up Sheet 1) Remove the photosensitive drum cleaner unit. 2) Remove the three screws [1], and detach the photosensitive drum cleaner scoop-up sheet [2]. [2] [1] [1] [1] Figure 6-669 4. Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner End Seal and Felt 1) Remove the photosensitive drum cleaner unit. 2) When removing the end seal, remove the two screws [1], and detach the photosensitive drum cleaner unit upper cover [2].
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5) Remove the screw [5] (one each), and remove the end felt [6]. [6] [6] [5] [5] Figure 6-672 G. Pre-Cleaning Sensor Assembly No. 2 Scoop-Up Sheet Assembly [2] 1. Replacing the No. 2 Scoop-Up Sheet Assembly 1) Remove the pre-cleaning sensor assembly. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the precleaning sensor [2]. 3) Mount the pre-cleaning sensor to the new No. 2 scoop-up sheet plate. 4) Mount the pre-cleaning sensor assembly to the copier. [1] [1] Figure 6-673 2.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM H. Black Toner Concentration Sensor Assembly [1] 1. Removing the Black Toner Concentration Sensor 1) Open the right front cover. 2) Open the hopper. 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the black toner concentration sensor unit [3]. [3] [2] Figure 6-674 4) Remove the two screws [4], and detach the black toner concentration sensor; then, disconnect the connector. [4] [4] Figure 6-675 Caution: 1.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Reference: The No. 2 blade may be used for both its sides (side 1, side 2). Mount it so that the number (1, 2) on the blade is visible from the side of the photosensitive drum. I. Cleaner Blade Reciprocating Motor [1] [2] [2] 1. Removing the Reciprocating Motor Assembly 1) Remove the photosensitive drum cleaner unit. 2) Remove the rear cover. 3) Remove the flywheel.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 6) Disconnect the three connectors [3]. [3] Figure 6-679 7) Remove the three screws [4], and remove the waste toner feed drive assembly [5]. At this time, take care not to drop gears or pins. [4] [5] [4] [4] Figure 6-680 8) Remove the screw [6], and pull off the waste toner feedscrew assembly [7] to the front. [6] [7] Figure 6-681 6-84 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM K. Developing Drive Assembly 1. Removing the Developing Drive Assembly and the Developing Assembly Rail 1) Remove all developing assemblies. 2) Remove the rear cover, right upper cover, and right rear cover. 3) Remove the flywheel. 4) Disconnect the four connectors [1], and remove the two screws [2]; then, detach the potential measurement PCB. 5) Open the CPU PCB. 6) Remove the drive assembly reinforcing plate.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM [9] 9) Disconnect the connector A [7]; then, move the lamp regulator unit slightly to the front, and disconnect the connector B [8] and the connector C [9], and detach the lamp regulator PCB. [7] [8] Figure 6-685 10) Disconnect the three connectors [10], and free the harness [11] to the developing drive assembly to the cable lamp. [11] [10] Figure 6-686 [12] [14] 11) Remove the two screws [12], and detach the cable guide [13].
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 13) Remove the four screws [16], and detach the developing drive assembly [17]. [17] [16] [18] [16] Caution: Take care not to hit the gear [18] on the drum shaft. [15] Figure 6-688 [20] 14) Disconnect the three connectors [19] found on the top of the multifeeder assembly. 15) Pull off the three pins [20] at the top, and shift the partition sheet [21] in the direction of the arrow. 16) Remove the transfer assembly frame from the copier.
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 20) Pull the developing assembly rail mount [28] slightly to the front, and detach it by rotating it clockwise. [28] Figure 6-691 6-88 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM This chapter explains the operations and functions of the copier’s pickup/delivery system and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems, and provides an outline of the timing at which various associated parts are driven. I. II. III. IV. V. OPERATIONS .............................7-1 A. Outline ....................................7-1 B. Arrangement of Rollers and Sensors ...........................7-2 PICKUP ASSEMBLY ...................7-5 A.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM I. OPERATIONS A. Outline The copier’s pickup system is equipped with the sources of copy paper shown in Table 7-101, and it uses a center reference method, in which copy paper is moved in the center of the pickup/ feeding path.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM B. Arrangement of Rollers and Sensors 1.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 2.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM Notation Name Remarks PS5 Pre-transfer paper sensor PS6 Post-transfer paper sensor PS7 Separation sensor PS9 Multifeeder pickup sensor PS12 Internal delivery sensor PS21 Pickup vertical path 1 sensor PS26 Pickup vertical path 2 sensor PS27 Pickup vertical path 3 sensor CLC1130/1150 only PS28 Re-pickup vertical path sensor CLC1150 only PS30 Pre-registration sensor PS31 External delivery sensor PS32 Delivery vertical path 1 sensor CLC1150 only
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM II. PICKUP ASSEMBLY A. Pickup from the Cassette 1. Outline The copier’s cassette pickup assembly consists of the pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller, and it is controlled as shown in Figures 7-201 and -202. Volume 4>Chapter 7>II.A “Cassette Pickup Assembly” The CLC1120' pickup system is identical to that of the CLC1130 except that it does not have the cassette 3. See the construction of the CLC1130.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM Table 7-203 shows the pickup motor, pickup clutch, and pickup roller solenoid used by each cassette of the copier.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
7-8 DPM11 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Pickup roller 1 solenoid drive signal (PUPD1SL) Pickup roller 2 solenoid drive signal (PUPD2SL) Cassette 1 pickup clutch drive signal (D1PUCL) Cassette 2 pickup clutch drive signal (D2PUCL) Cassette 1 pickup motor drive pulses Cassette 2 pickup motor drive pulses CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM DC driver PCB DCL12 DSL8 DCL13 DSL9 DPM12 Figure 7-202 Pickup Assembly of the CLC1150 CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM B. Lifter Movement 1. Outline When the cassette is slid into the copier, the pickup roller lowers, and the light-blocking plate leaves the lifter position sensor. This condition turns on the lifter motor and, as a result, the lifter moves up. The lifter motor stops when the lifter position sensor detects the top surface of the stack of copy paper on the lifter.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 2. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper The presence/absence of copy paper inside the cassette is detected by the cassette paper sensor. Pickup roller Feeding rollers Copy paper Separation roller Lifter position sensor Lifter Paper sensor Open/closed sensor Figure 7-203 3.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM If you have replaced the paper level detecting VR or initialized the RAM, you must enter the factory values recorded on the service label in service mode: Related Service Mode ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C1-LVOL Use it to enter the slice level of paper volume for cassette 1 (for 50 sheets) ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C1-HVOL Use it to enter the slice level of paper volume for cassette 1 (for 275 sheets) ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C2-LVOL Use it to enter the slice level of paper volume for cassette 2 (fo
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM Horizontal size guide plate (rear) Paper width detecting VR Paper length sensor unit Horizontal size guide plate (front) Cassette Rear end guide plate Figure 7-205 3. Paper Sizes and Cassettes Table 7-206 shows the paper sizes that may be used with the copier. All cassettes may be used for transparencies, but label sheets (special) and thick paper (106 to 209 g/m2) may be used only with the multifeeder.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 4. Paper Width Basic Value If you have replaced the paper width detecting volume or initialized the RAM, you need to enter the paper width basic values for STMTR and A4R in service mode: Related Service Mode ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C2-STMTR Use it to change the paper width basic value for STMTR for cassette 2. ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C2-A4R Use it to change the paper width basic value for A4R for cassette 2.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 5.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM D. Pickup from the Multifeeder 1. Operations The multifeeder pickup assembly consists of the parts shown in Table 7-207. For multifeeder, the copier recognizes that paper is thick paper when the user selects ‘thick paper’ on its control panel. Volume 4>Chapter 7>II.B>2. “Multifeeder” (b.2) Item Description Pickup method Picks up paper from the stack continuously. (pickup roller + feed roller + separation roller) Tray capacity 250 sheets (of 81.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM Main motor Multifeeder pickup clutch CL16 Multifeeder feed clutch CL10 M4 Multifeeder feed roller 1 Multifeeder SL14 pickup solenoid Multifeeder feed roller 2 Multifeeder pickup roller Transparency sensor (PS69) Pre-registration PM8 motor Multifeeder separation roller Pre-registration roller 2 Registration sensor (PS30) M15 Multifeeder lifter motor Sensor lever Figure 7-207 2. Detecting the Size of Paper Volume 4>Chapter 7>II.B>3.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 3. Movement of the Lifter Volume 4>Chapter 7>II.B>4. “Movement of the Lifter” The multifeeder lifter is constructed as shown in Figure 7-209. The multifeeder tray open/closed sensor monitors the state (open/closed) of the multifeeder tray so as not to drive the lifter motor while the multifeeder tray is closed. Related Error Code E040 The lifter sensor does not turn on within a specific period of time after the lifter motor has turned on.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 4.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM E. Picking Up Transparencies Transparencies may be fed using the multifeeder or a cassette (by selecting a cassette in user mode). When copying on a transparency (full-color only), the copier slows down the fixing roller to ensure proper fixing. The copier is capable of recognizing transparencies of A4, A4R, LTR, or LTR-R without input from the control panel.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM Caution: 1. When a cassette is used while the copier is in full-color copying mode, a jam will occur if a medium of a type not selected on the control panel (copy paper or transparency) is detected. 2. A jam will occur if a medium of a type not selected on the control panel (copy paper or transparency) is fed while the copier is in mono-color copying mode. Reference: 1.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM III. DUPLEXING UNIT (CLC1150 ONLY) A. Outline 1. Basic Construction Item Description 2 Duplexing tray capacity 50 sheets (of 105 g/m paper) Fixing motor (M5) Drives the delivery system. Delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid (SL10) Used to switch the paper path (external delivery and delivery vertical path) Duplexing motor (M14) DC motor; used to drive the delivery vertical path/ duplexing unit system.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM Delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid Re-pickup motor SL10 Fixing motor M5 PM13 Duplexing motor Delivery vertical path clutch Re-pickup clutch CL15 M14 CL19 Duplexing SL13 paper feed roller solenoid CL14 Duplexing paper feed clutch Stacking guide plate solenoid SL15 SL12 Stopper plate solenoid Figure 7-301 Duplexing Drive System 7-22 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 2.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM B. Stacking Paper When its side has been processed, copy paper is moved to the delivery vertical path assembly as the delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid (SL10) turns on. Then, it is moved through the duplexing path, and is turned over by the duplexing reversing roller.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM Duplexing paper feed roller solenoid SL1 3 M14 Duplexing motor CL14 Duplexing feed roller Duplexing paper feed clutch Figure 7-304 C. Movement of the Paper Jogging Guide Plate 1. Operations The paper jogging guide plate operates to prevent skew movement and jamming during repickup by operating each time copy paper arrives at the duplexing tray.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM (In reverse) Paper jogging guide plate (rear) (forward) 8 mm Paper jogging plate 8 mm Copy paper Paper jogging guide plate (front) Paper jogging PM14 guide motor Light-blocking plate Paper jogging guide HP sensor (PS40) (forward) DC driver PCB Figure 7-305a Duplexing Tray (top view) 8 mm (reverse) 8 mm Last copy? NO YES (forward) Figure 7-305b Paper Jogging Operation 7-26 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM D.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM E. Re-Pickup from the Duplexing Unit 1. Operations When copying on the second side of a double-sided copy, pickup will be from the stack of copy paper on the duplexing tray. The duplexing feed roller is lowered to prevent skew movement during re-pickup in response to a press on the Copy Start key or after copying on the first side, and the paper jogging guide plate is moved to a point 0.5 mm from copy paper.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 2.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM IV. CONTROLLING THE REGISTRATION/ ATTRACTION MECHANISM A. Outline After pickup, copy paper is moved by the pre-registration rollers 1 and 2, and is caused to arch at the registration roller for removal of the skew. Then, it is moved as far as the attraction roller, which serves to keep the copy paper against the transfer drum sheet.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM B. Locking and Unlocking the Registration Roller When copy paper from the registration roller is put on the transfer drum sheet, the registration roller releasing solenoid (SL5) turns on, causing the registration locking cam to rotate and, at the same time, releasing the registration link roller from the registration roller by the drive of the main motor (M4).
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM C. Controlling the Attraction Mechanism The copier’s transfer drum is designed to retain copy paper on the transfer drum sheet using static charges. During copying operation, the attraction roller solenoid (SL6) remains on for a period of time equal to the length of the copy paper to bring the attraction roller in contact with the transfer drum sheet. At this time, the attraction brush turns on, causing the transfer drum sheet to attract the copy paper. Reference: 1.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM D.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM V. TRANSFER DRUM A. Outline The transfer drum is constructed as shown in Figure 7-501. The transfer drum keeps copy paper against the transfer drum sheet using static charges, and sends it to the fixing assembly after transfer (maximum of four times).
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM Related Error Code E012 Error in the drum motor. E072 Error in the transfer cleaner locking motor, transfer drum cleaner brush motor, or polishing roller motor. E073 Error in the drawer connector of the transfer unit or transfer unit lever. E074 Error in the transfer drum unit home position. E079 Error in the transfer drum cleaner unit home position.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM B. Controlling the Locking Cam Inside the Transfer Drum The transfer drum houses the attraction brush, transfer blade, and an internal brush for cleaning. Each brush or blade is away from the transfer drum sheet, and is brought against the transfer drum sheet by its respective locking cam when the attraction/transfer locking cam motor (PM7) turns on as needed. (See Figure 7-502.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM Position of the locking cam State Home position The attraction brush, transfer blade, and inside brush are all off. During attraction and transfer of 1st color The attraction brush and the transfer blade are on; the inside brush is off. Figure 7-503a COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM Position of the locking cam State During transfer of 2nd to 4th color The transfer blade is on; the attraction brush and inside brush are off. During transfer drum cleaning The inside brush is on; the attraction brush and transfer blade are off. Figure 7-503b 7-38 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM C. Controlling Separation 1. Outline Copy paper retained by the transfer drum is separated by the separation claw and the separation push-up roll regardless of how it is placed (side A or B). (See Figure 7-505.) Volume 4>Chapter 6>IV.B>b. “Claw and Push-Up Roll” Separation push-up solenoid (SL3) Separation push-up roll Separation claw solenoid (SL4) (front) Figure 7-504 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 2. Separating Paper Separation claw roll SL3 [1] Copy paper OFF The figure shows the state immediately after transfer to copy paper, and both the separation solenoid (SL4) and the separation push-up solenoid (SL3) are off.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM D. Cleaning the Separation Drum Sheet 1. Outline The transfer drum sheet uses static charges to keep and move copy paper and, as such, it is subject to adhesion of foreign matter. The presence of foreign matter on the transfer drum sheet can soil the back of copy paper and can lead to an attraction fault or transfer fault.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 2. External Brush As many as two external brushes are provided: by the drive of the transfer drum cleaner motor (M8), the upper brush rotates in the same direction as the transfer drum, while the lower brush rotates in the opposite direction at a high speed. The toner and paper lint cleaned by the brushes are collected inside the cleaner unit. The transfer drum cleaner unit houses external brushes.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM The polishing roller is unlocked and moved away from the transfer drum sheet by rotating the motor (M9) in reverse. Table 7-504 shows the condition and length of operation of the polishing roller.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM E.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM VI. DETECTING JAMS A. Outline Table 7-601 shows the sensors used to monitor the presence/absence and movement of copy paper.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM The presence of paper or a jam is checked in terms of the presence/absence of paper at a specific sensor at such times as programmed in advance. The copier is capable of remembering the number of copies remaining to be made and the selected copying mode so that the copy count or the copying mode need not be set once again if it has been opened and closed for jam removal.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM B.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM VII. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY (PICK-UP ASSEMBLY) The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier’s parts while keeping the following in mind: Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work. 1. 2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM A. Pickup Assembly 1. Construction Cassette 1/2/3 Pickup Assembly [1] [2] [1] Pickup roller [2] Feed roller [3] Separation roller [3] Figure 7-701 2. Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly/Duplexing Pickup Assembly The cassette pickup assembly may be removed regardless of the type of copier. The following cites the duplexing model. [1] [2] 1) Open the front cover (left, right). 2) Slide out the cassette/duplexing unit.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Remove the three screws [3], and disconnect the two connectors [4]; then, detach the second pickup assembly [5]. [3] [5] [4] [3] figure 7-703 5) Remove the four screws [6], and disconnect the connector [7]; then, slide out the duplexing pickup assembly [8] slowly to detach. [6] [8] [7] [6] [6] Caution: Take care not to drop the pickup assembly when sliding it out. Figure 7-704 7-50 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 3. Removing the Pickup Roller 1) Remove the cassette pickup assembly. 2) Remove the resin E-ring [1], and pull out the pickup roller [2] together with its collar. 3) Remove the one at the rear in the same way. [2] [1] Figure 7-705 Caution: a. When mounting the pickup roller [1] to the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [2] on its rubber portion is to the front of the copier. The pickup roller is identified by color (front and rear).
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 5) Remove the two screws [5], and detach the separation roller support mount [6]. [5] [6] [5] Figure 7-708 6) Remove the separation roller [7]. [7] Figure 7-709 Caution: a. When mounting the feed roller [1] to the pickup assembly, be sure that the gear [2] attached to the feed roller is at the front of the copier. b. When mounting the separation roller [1] to the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [2] is at the front as shown.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 5. Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller 1) Remove the two screws [2] and detection lower guide [1]. [2] [1] [2] Figure 7-711 2) Remove the paper guide [3]. [3] Figure 7-712 3) Remove the two screws [4], and detach the separation roller assembly [5]. [4] [5] [4] Figure 7-713 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 4) If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup operation, change the position of the pressure spring [6] of the separation roller. a.If double feeding occurs, move the hook of the spring in the direction of arrow A. b. If pickup failure occurs, move the hook of the spring in the director of arrow B. [A] [B] Figure 7-714 Caution: a. Do not loosen the screw [1] used to secure the separation pressure spring plate in place. [1] Figure 7-715 [1] b.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 6. Position of the Cassette Pickup Assembly and Pickup Roller Solenoid (SL7, SL8, SL9) The position of the solenoid need not be adjusted. Mount it where the solenoid was initially found. (If you have to remove the solenoid, be sure to mark its position with a scriber in advance.) 7. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration of the Cassette 1) Remove the cassette that needs to be adjusted. 2) Loosen the screw [1].
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 8. Removing the Duplexing Unit Feed Roller 1) Remove the duplexing pickup assembly. 2) Remove the resin E-ring [1]. 3) Remove the feed roller [2]. [1] [2] Figure 7-719 9. Removing the Duplex Unit Separation Roller 1) Remove the duplexing pickup assembly. 2) Remove the screw [1], and remove the face plate [2]. [2] [1] Figure 7-720 3) Remove the screw [3], and remove the separation roller assembly [4]. [3] [4] Figure 7-721 7-56 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Remove the resin E-ring [5], and detach the separation roller [6]. [6] [5] Figure 7-722 Caution: a. When attaching the feed roller [1], be sure that the round marking [2] is at the front. b. When mounting the separation roller [3], be sure that the round marking [4] is at the rear. [2] [2] [4] [3] [1] [4] Figure 7-723 10. Removing the Duplexing Unit Pickup Roller 1) Remove the duplexing pickup assembly.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Loosen the screw [4] on the paper guide. [4] Figure 7-725 [5] [6] [5] 4) Remove the two screws [5], and remove the paper guide upper [6]. Figure 7-726 5) Remove the resin E-ring [7], and remove the pickup roller [8]. [7] [8] Figure 7-727 7-58 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM Caution: a. When mounting the pickup roller [1] to the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [2] on the rubber portion is at the front. The pickup roller is identified by color (front and rear): Use the gold-colored pickup roller for the front. Use the silver-colored pickup roll for the rear. b. Do not detach the rubber portion of the pickup roller from the collar. [2] [2] [1] [1] Figure 7-728 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM B. Multifeeder 1. Removing the Multifeeder Assembly 1) Remove the right middle cover, right front cover, right rear cover, right rear face cover, and right front face cover. 2) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and remove the four screws [2]; then, detach the multifeeder assembly [3]. [2] [2] [3] [2] [1] [2] Figure 7-729 2. Removing the Pickup Roller, Feed Roller, and Separation Roller 1) Remove the right middle cover.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Remove the screw [5], and detach the upper paper guide plate [6]. [5] [6] Figure 6-732 [8] [7] 5) Remove the E-ring [7] and the bushing [8] of the pickup roller shaft. Figure 7-733 6) Remove the resin E-ring [9], and detach the feed roller [10] and the pickup roller shaft at the same time. [9] [10] Figure 7-734 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 7) Remove the two screws [11], and detach the lower paper guide plate [12]. [12] [11] 8) Remove the separation roller [13]. Figure 7-735 [13] Caution: The separation roller is secured in position to the shaft with parallel pin. Take good care not to drop the pin when removing or mounting it. Figure 7-736 Reference: a. Mount the pickup roller [1] so that the round marking is at the rear. b. Mount the feed roller [2] so that the round marking is at the rear. c.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 3. Left/Right Registration If left/right registration is wrong when pickup is from the multifeeder, adjust the screw [1] to adjust the position of the tray. [1] Figure 7-738 2.0 1.5mm 0 2 4 6 8 10 Figure 7-739 4. Attaching the Timing Belt for the Multifeeder Assembly Keep the rack plate [1] of the multifeeder closed. Move the slide volume [2] in the direction of the arrow, and attach the timing belt [3]. 5.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM C. Duplexing Unit 1. Removing the Duplexing 1) Remove the right center cover, right front cover, face cover, and cassette switch cover. 2) Open the waste toner box cover. 3) Slide out the duplexing unit. 4) Remove the two screws [1], and remove the two stopper plates [2]. 5) Remove the duplexing unit. [2] [1] [2] Figure 7-741 2. Removing the Feed Roller 1) Slide out the duplexing unit. 2) Detach the paper retaining guide plate [1] by squeezing it slightly.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 3. Remove the Duplexing Feed Assembly 1) Remove the duplexing unit. 2) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the duplexing cover [2]. [1] [1] [1] [2] Figure 7-744 3) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the duplexing stay. [3] Figure 7-745 [4] 4) Disconnect the connector [4]. Figure 7-746 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 5) Loosen the strap [5] fitted in the feed upper guide to free it from the boss and detach. [5] Figure 7-747 6) Open the duplexing feed cover [6], and detach it from the bushing at the rear. [6] Figure 7-748 7) Remove the E-ring [7], and remove the gear [8] (pay attention to the pin) and the belt (orange) [9]. [9] [7] [8] Figure 7-749 7-66 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 8) Loosen the screw on the tension plate [10]. At this time, take care not to lose the pin. [10] Figure 7-750 [11] 9) Remove the gear [11] (pay attention to the pin) and the belt (black) [12]. [12] Figure 7-751 10) Remove the E-ring [13] at the rear, and shift the bushing [14]. [13] [14] Figure 7-752 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 11) Remove the guide plate [15] from the guide shaft of the duplexing feed assembly (both front and rear). [15] Figure 7-753 12) Lift the rear of the duplexing feed assembly [16], and pull it off. [16] Figure 7-754 4. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration of the Duplexing Unit 1) Slide out the duplexing, and open the duplexing feeding assembly. 2) Loosen the two screws [1]. [1] Figure 7-755 7-68 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Adjust the left/right registration adjusting plate so that the horizontal registration is 2.0± 15. mm in reference to the image. 2.0 1.5mm 0 2 4 6 8 10 Figure 7-756 5. Adjusting the Position of the Paper Jogging Guide Sensor (PS40) 1) Select A4R or LTRR, and complete copying on the first side of a double-sided copy. 2) Slide out the duplexing unit. 3) Measure the distance L of the paper jogging guide plate [1]. A4R: L = 210 ±0.3 mm LTRR: L = 216 ±0.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 6. Assembling the Paper Jogging Guide Plate Drive Assembly Keep the paper jogging guide plate closed. At this time, assemble the parts so that the rack and the pinion are as shown. Figure 7-760 7. Position of the Stopper Plate Solenoid 1) Keep the steel core [1] of the solenoid pulled to the solenoid body. 2) Rotate the shutter [2] so that the distance L1 in the figure is 1.0 ±0.2 mm; then, mount the stopper plate solenoid. [L1] [2] [1] Figure 7-761 8.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 9. Position of the Stacking Guide Solenoid Mount the stacking guide solenoid in the center of the long hole [1] in the solenoid base. (Be sure to mark the position of the solenoid with a scriber before removing it.) [1] Figure 7-763 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM D. Pickup Motor Drive Assembly [2] 1. Removing the Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly/Re-Pickup Drive Assembly The cassette pickup drive assembly and the re-pickup drive assembly may be removed in the same way. The following cites the repickup drive assembly: 1) Remove the cassette pickup assembly or the duplexing pickup assembly. 2) Remove the rear cover. 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the three screws [2]; then, remove the repickup drive assembly [3].
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM VIII. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY (TRANSFER ASSEMBLY/DELIVERY ASSEMBLY) The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier’s parts while keeping the following in mind: Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work. 1. 2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted. 3.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM A. Removing the Transfer Drum Assembly/Transfer Drum Frame 1. Removing the Transfer Drum Caution: The one-way clutch is in operation while the transfer drum is on the transfer drum frame. Do not rotate the transfer drum while keeping your fingers in an opening of the transfer drum. The transfer drum, on the other hand, will rotate in reverse when it is off the frame. Keep this in mid.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Holding the rear of the transfer drum by your right hand, grasp the handle of the transfer drum with your left hand, and lift it. Caution: Take care not to let the attraction roller come into contact with the transfer drum sheet. Figure 7-803 4) Place the transfer drum assembly as shown. Figure 7-804 2. Points to Note When Handling the Transfer Drum After placing the transfer drum on the transfer drum frame, check to make sure that it is as shown.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM Wrong Figure 7-806 If you have replaced the transfer drum, be sure to perform the following in service mode (ADJUST>FED-ADJ; p. 13-2): 1. Attraction timing adjustment (ATT-T-A, ATT-A-B) 2. Image leading edge margin adjustment (RG-XA, RG-XB, RG-Y) 3. Attraction position adjustment (TRDELAY_A, TR-DELAY_B) 4. Image rear end adjustment (TR-END-A, TR-END-B) 3. Removing the Transfer Drum Frame 1) Slide out the transfer drum frame. 2) Remove the fixing assembly.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM B. No. 1 Feeding Assembly 1. Construction No.1 feed assembly Figure 7-808 [2] 2. Removing the Horizontal Path Assembly 1) Slide out the transfer frame. 2) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the two connectors [2]; then, detach the solenoid unit [3]. [1] [3] [2] Figure 7-809 3) Disconnect the connector [4], and remove the two screws [5]. 4) Shift the horizontal path assembly [6] slightly to the right; then, detach it by pulling carefully to the front.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 3. Removing the Attraction Roller Unit 1) Slide out the transfer frame, and remove the transfer cover and the transfer frame cover. 2) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the two connectors [2]; then, remove the solenoid unit [3]. [2] [1] [3] [2] Figure 7-811 3) Remove the screw [4], detach the positioning pin [5]. [5] [4] Figure 7-812 4) Move the attraction roller unit [6] to the front.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 5) Put the rear positioning shaft (left) [7] under the gear [8]. [8] [7] Figure 7-814 6) Put the front positioning shaft [9] through the large hole to detach the attraction roll unit. [9] Caution: Do not insert the transfer drum frame without fitting the solenoid unit removed in step 2) back in to avoid damage. When you have detached the attraction roll unit, be sure to mount it back to its initial position with its screw. Figure 7-815 4.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 2) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the scraper [4]. [4] [3] Figure 7-817 5. Removing the Attraction Roller 1) Remove the attraction roller unit. 2) Remove the scraper of the attraction roller. 3) Remove the resin fixing ring [1] at the front, and detach the attraction roller [2]. [1] [2] Figure 7-818 6. Replacing the Attraction Roller Unit Spring Clutch Assembly 1) Remove the attraction roller unit.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 6) Apply several drops of lubricating oil in the gap [5] between the spring clutch gear [3] and the control ring [4]. 7) After applying oil, rotate the gear of the spring clutch several times so that the oil is spread through the gap between the gear and the control ring; then, apply several more drops of oil. 8) Repeat steps 6) and 7) so that as many as ten drops of oil have been applied in total. 9) Wipe off any oil that has spread onto the control ring.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Remove the three screws [5], and detach the attraction roller drive gear unit [6]. [5] [6] [5] Figure 7-823 [7] 5) Remove the roller pressure spring (rear) [7]. Figure 7-824 6) Remove the E-ring [9] and spring [10] of the registration roller upper [8]; then, remove the bushing [11]. [11] [10] [8] [9] Figure 7-825 7-82 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 7) Pull out the registration roller [12] as shown. [12] Caution: The transparency sensor is located under the metal portion of the registration roller; be sure not to let the roller in contact with it. Figure 7-826 8) Remove the E-ring [13] and the washer [14]; then, pull off the bushing [15].
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 10) Remove the E-ring [18], two washers [19], spring [20], and bushing [21]. [18] [20] [21] [19] Figure 7-829 11) Pull out the registration rubber roller [22] as shown. [22] Figure 7-830 7-84 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 8. Replacing the Registration Roller Releasing Spring Clutch Assembly 1) Remove the solenoid plate, and loosen the hex-hole screw [1] using a hex key; then, detach the spring clutch assembly [2]. [1] [2] Figure 7-831 [5] 2) Clean the shaft to which the spring clutch assembly was attached with alcohol. 3) Loosen the hex-hole screw of the new spring clutch, and mount it to the shaft. At this time, keep the spring clutch butted against the E-ring side.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM C. Transfer Cleaner Unit 1. Removing the Transfer Cleaner Unit 1) Remove the transfer drum frame cover. 2) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the two connectors [2]; then, detach the transfer cleaner unit. [1] [2] Figure 7-834 2. Removing the Transfer Cleaner Brush 1) Remove the transfer cleaner unit. 2) Turn the bushing [1] of the brush 180° in the direction of the arrow to detach the brush. [1] Figure 7-835 3.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the scraper (upper, lower) [4]. [3] [4] Figure 7-837 4. Removing the Transfer Drum Cleaner Assembly Filter 1) Remove the transfer cleaner unit. 2) Lift the rail guide plate [1]. 3) Remove the screw [2], and detach the filter cover [3]. 4) Remove the filter. [1] [3] [2] Figure 7-838 5. Applying Lubricant to the Transfer Drum Cleaner 1) Use a specific lubricant (e.g., FY9-6006).
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM D. Transfer Drum Assembly 1.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 2. Removing the Transfer Drum Sheet 1) Open the front cover, and slide out the hopper; then, open it 180°. 2) Slide out the transfer drum frame. 3) Remove the transfer drum from the transfer drum frame. 4) Remove the four TP screws [1], and remove the transfer drum side scraper [2]. [2] [1] [2] [1] Figure 7-840 5) Peel off the trailing edge of the transfer drum sheet, and keep the edge loose. Figure 7-841 6) Peel off the leading edge of the transfer drum sheet.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 7) As if to lift the leading edge of the transfer drum sheet, peel off the sheet. Caution: If adhesive remains on the ring of the transfer drum, be sure to remove it completely. Figure 7-843 3. Attaching the Transfer Drum Sheet Caution: Take care not to touch the area of the transfer drum sheet where copy paper will come into contact. 1) Clean the area of the transfer drum ring where adhesive tape was found.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Peel the adhesive tape from the adhesive tape from the leading edge (where holes are found) of the transfer drum sheet. 4) Match the holes along the leading edge of the transfer drum sheet with the holes in the ring connecting plate, and attach the leading edge of the sheet. Figure 7-845 5) Peel off the adhesive type of the transfer drum sheet.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM Caution: Be sure that the center of the transfer drum sheet does not warp or is slack. If it warps, the transfer drum sheet will come into contact with the photosensitive drum, allowing toner to cake on the photosensitive drum and, consequently, leading to photosensitive drum cleaning faults. If it is slack, white spots, color displacement, or other image faults can occur.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 4. Removing the Attraction Brush 1) Turn the locking lever [1] clockwise to free the lock. 2) Remove the screw [2], and pull out the attraction brush [3]. [2] [3] [1] Figure 7-852 [1] [3] 5. Remove the Transfer Blade 1) Turn the locking lever [1] clockwise to free the lock. 2) Remove the screw [2]; then, pull out the transfer blade [3]. Caution: When pulling out the transfer blade, take care not to bring the plastic film into contact with the flange.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 7. Removing the Internal Static Eliminator 1) Remove the transfer drum from the transfer drum frame. 2) Turn the transfer drum to match the holes in the plate at the rear of the transfer drum and the holes in the transfer drum. 3) Remove the claw [1], and pull out the internal static eliminator [2] [2] [1] Figure 7-855 8. Removing the Separation Changing Assembly 1) Pull out the transfer drum frame.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 10. Removing the Polishing Roller Unit 1) Remove the transfer drum from the transfer drum frame. 2) To protect the transfer sheet from scratches, place the transfer drum unit on a fault place. Figure 7-858 3) Remove the screw [1], and push down the polishing roller locking lever [2] once; then, turn it clockwise to free the lock. [2] [1] Figure 7-859 Caution: The four pins [3] used to keep the spring from turning will slip off when the lock is freed.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Remove the screw [4], E-ring [5] (inside the shaft 1), and shaft connecting member [6]; then, detach the gear unit 1 [7] together with its shaft. [7] [6] [5] [4] Figure 7-861 5) Remove the two E-rings [8] (outside the shaft 2) and the screw [9], and disconnect the connector [10]; then, remove the polishing roller motor unit [11]. [8] [8] [10] [11] [9] Figure 7-862 7-96 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 11. Removing the Separation Push-Up Solenoid 1) Remove the transfer drum from the transfer drum frame. 2) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the two transfer sheet scrapers [2]. 3) Peel off the transfer sheet. [2] [2] [1] [1] Figure 7-863 4) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the spring [4]. [4] [3] Figure 7-864 5) Remove the E-ring [5] from the front side plate of the transfer drum. [5] Figure 7-865 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 6) Remove the E-ring [6] from the rear side plate of the transfer drum, and detach the separation claw unit. Caution: Pay attention to the spring on the shaft of the separation claw unit. [6] Figure 7-866 [8] [7] 7) Remove the two screws [7], and detach the separation push-up solenoid [8]. Figure 7-867 [2] 12. Remove the Brush Motor (M11) 1) Remove the transfer drum from the transfer drum frame.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Peel off the transfer sheet. 4) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the two screws [4]; then, detach the brush motor [5]. [4] [5] [3] Figure 7-869 13. Removing the Transfer Cleaner Push-On Brush Unit 1) Remove the transfer drum from the transfer drum frame. 2) Remove the polishing roller unit. 3) Peel off the transfer sheet. 4) Turn the transfer drum ring so that the dent (shown in the figure) in the rear ring is opposite the brush.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM 14. Removing the Separation Push-Up Roll 1) Remove the transfer drum from the transfer drum frame. 2) Peel off the transfer sheet. 3) Remove the separation push-up roll [1]. [1] Figure 7-872 E. Transfer Drum Locking Motor Assembly (PM5) 1) 2) 3) 4) Slide out the transfer drum frame. Remove the rear cover. Open the CPU PCB. Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the two connectors [2]; then, detach the transfer drum locking motor assembly.
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM F. Transfer Drum Cleaner Locking Motor Assembly (PM6) 1. Removing the Transfer Drum Cleaner Locking Motor Assembly 1) Slide out the transfer drum frame. 2) Remove the rear cover. 3) Open the CPU PCB. 4) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the external static eliminator connector [2]. 5) Remove the two screws [3], and remove the fixing assembly connector base [4].
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM H. Duplexing Delivery Assembly (CLC1150 only) 1. Removing the Duplexing Delivery Assembly 1) Remove the left upper cover and the left lower cover. 2) Remove the delivery upper cover. 3) Remove the nine screws [1], and disconnect the two connectors [2]. 4) Slide out the delivery unit slowly to detach. [1] [1] [1] [2] Figure 7-876 2. Position of the Delivery Assembly Paper Deflecting Plate Drive Solenoid (SL10) 1) Remove the delivery assembly.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM This chapter explains the operations and functions of the copier’s fixing system and the relationship between the electrical and mechanical systems, and provides an outline of the timing at which various associated parts are driven. I. II. OPERATIONS .............................8-1 A. Outline ....................................8-1 B. Sequence of Operations (fixing system) ........................8-3 FIXING DRIVE SYSTEM ............8-4 A.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM I. OPERATIONS A. Outline Table 8-101 shows the major functions of the fixing unit assembly.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM Related Service Code DISPLY>ANALOG>FIX-U DISPLY>ANALOG>FIX-L DISPLY>ERROR FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB Fixing upper roller temperature Fixing lower roller temperature Error history display Nip measurement Cleaning belt counter clear Fixing upper cleaning belt solenoid (SL1) Fixing upper cleaning belt Fixing motor M5 One-way clutch Oil pipe Oil applying felt Fixing upper cleaning belt length sensor (PS11) Fixing blade Oil pan Fixing upper roller Fixing lower cl
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM B.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM II. FIXING DRIVE SYSTEM A. Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller The copier controls its fixing at one of two speeds to ensure good fixing performance for all types of transfer media (plain paper, transparency). The fixing motor starts to rotate when the drive signal (FXMON) goes ‘1’, and its speed is switched based on the combination of the states of the speed switch signals (FXMSP0, FXMSP1).
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM FXMON Fixing motor FXMSP0 DC driver PCB FXMSP1 Rotation speed control circuit Motor driver FXMLK M5 Rotation speed detection circuit Figure 8-201 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM B. Taking Up the Fixing Cleaning Belt The copier’s fixing upper and lower rollers are each equipped with a cleaning mechanism which uses a cleaning belt. The cleaning belt is taken up about 0.4 mm each time the fixing cleaning belt solenoid (SL1 for upper, SL2 for lower) turns on and off. The number of times the fixing cleaning belt turns on and off depends on the length of copy paper (feeding direction; both upper and lower solenoids).
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM Fixing upper cleaning belt (front) Fixing upper cleaning belt length sensor (PS11) Fixing lower cleaning belt Arm Arm (rear) Fixing lower cleaning belt length sensor (PS67) Figure 8-202 C. Fixing Oil Applying Mechanism The copier uses a circulatory method to apply fixing oil, and oil is applied directly to the fixing upper roller and spread by oil applying felt to prevent offset.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM Related Error Code E008 0000 This code is indicated if the oil pump driver PCB does not operate in the presence of the oil pump drive signal (FXOILPD=1) generated by the DC-CPU. 0001 This code is indicated when the oil pump driver PCB is in operation while the DC-CPU keeps the oil pump drive signal (EXOILPD=0) off.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM III. CONTROLLING THE FIXING TEMPERATURE A. Controlling the Temperature of the Fixing Roller The fixing upper roller and the fixing lower roller are each heated by a fixing heater (main heater H1, sub heater H2). The surface temperature of the upper roller is monitored by the fixing upper thermistor 1 (THM1) and that of the lower fixing roller is monitored by the fixing lower thermistor 3 (THM3) in terms of voltage.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM Power switch ON Copy Start key ON 130 C 158 C DSRDY Photosensitive drum revolution Transfer drum revolution AINTR WMUP 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 STBY 5 6 COPY INTR 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 LSTR 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 STBY 9 9 Side A sensor (PS2) Side B sensor (PS3) M M C C Y Y Bk Bk Laser Main heater (H1) Sub heater (H2) Cleaning belt solenoid (SL1, SL2) *3 Controlled to 158 C *2 *3 Controlled to 158 C *2 *3 *3 *1 Oil pump (PSP) Main motorl Drum motor (M2) 75mm/sec Fixing motor
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM B. Protective Functions The copier is equipped with the following six protective mechanisms to prevent malfunction of the fixing heater: a. The DC-CPU monitors the voltage of the thermistor (THM1, THM3). When it detects 210°C or more, the copier will indicate ‘E000’ on the control panel, generate SHUTOFF* signal, and turn off the main switch (SW1). b.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM AC power cut relay Thermal switch (TP2) Main heater (H1) DC driver PCB SSR1 UHON Thermal switch (TP3) LHON RL1 Sub heater (H2) Transfer unit lever Delivery door Left front door switch (SW3) switch (SW5) switch (SW4) USSRD LSSRD +24V DC power supply PCB FU925 DC fuse PCB SHUTOFF* Power switch (SW1) Fixing upper cleaning belt TP2 High temperature detection circuit + Fixing upper thermistor (THM1) Fixing upper roller H1 Fixing upper thermistor 2 (THM2) Fixing lower thermis
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM IV. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier’s parts while keeping the following in mind: Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work. 1. 2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM A. Fixing Assembly 1. 1) 2) 3) 4) Removing the Fixing Assembly Open the front cover. Remove the fixing cover. Slide out the transfer drum frame. Grasp the front and rear handles of the fixing assembly, and lift it to detach. Figure 8-401 2. Opening the Fixing Upper Roller Unit 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the fixing cover. 3) Slide out the transfer drum frame. 4) Remove the two screws [1], and detach detection fixing upper cover [2].
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM 3. 1) 2) 3) 4) Removing the Fixing Upper Heater Open the front cover. Remove the fixing cover. Slide out the transfer drum frame. Pull out the faston [1] at the rear of the fixing upper heater. [1] Figure 8-404 5) Pull out the faston [2] at the front of the fixing upper heater, and remove the screw [3]; then, remove the metal fixing [4]. 6) Slide out the fixing upper heater to the front. [2] [4] [3] Figure 8-405 [4] [5] 4.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM 8) Shift the bearing [6] (front, rear) of the fixing upper roller, and pull out the fixing upper roller [7] as shown. [6] [7] [6] Figure 8-408 5. Removing the Fixing Lower Heater 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the transfer drum frame cover and the fixing cover. 3) Slide out the transfer drum frame. 4) Pull out the faston [1] at the rear of the fixing lower heater.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM 6. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Removing the Fixing Lower Roller Open the front cover. Remove the fixing cover. Slide out the transfer drum frame. Remove the fixing assembly unit. Remove the screw [1], and slide the fixing inlet guide [2] to the rear to detach. [2] [1] Figure 8-411 [4] [3] 6) Remove the fixing lower heater. 7) Open the fixing upper roller unit. 8) Remove the screw [3], and shift the heater faston base [4]. Figure 8-412 9) Pull out the fixing lower roller as shown.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM 7. Difference among Fixing Rollers (upper/lower, front/rear) · · [1] Front of the Roller The fixing upper roller has the shorter U-shaped cut off [1]. The fixing lower roller [2] has the longer cut-off. Rear of the Roller The fixing upper roller has a D-cut [3]. The fixing lower roller does not have any special marking. [2] [3] Figure 8-414 Caution: Take care. The gear [1] used for each roller has its own orientation. [1] Figure 8-415 8-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM 8. Removing the Fixing Upper Thermistor 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the transfer drum frame. 3) Remove the two screws, and detach the fixing upper cover. 4) Remove the screw [1] (one each), and remove the fixing upper thermistor. [1] Figure 8-416 9. Removing the Fixing Lower Thermistor 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the transfer drum frame cover and the fixing cover. 3) Slide out the transfer drum frame. 4) Remove the fixing assembly unit.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM 10. Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch (lower) 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the fixing cover. 3) Slide out the transfer drum frame. 4) Remove the fixing unit. 5) Remove the two screws [1], and remove the cable of the thermal switch; then, remove the screw [2], and detach the fixing lower thermal switch. [1] [2] Figure 8-418 11. Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch (upper) 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the transfer drum frame.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM The nip width is correct if as indicated in the table. Otherwise, turn the adjusting nut [1] to make adjustments. Caution: b and c are points 10 to 15 mm from the edges of paper. b (feeding direction) A3 · a Center of paper c B. Fixing Cleaner Assembly 1. Removing the Fixing Upper Cleaning Belt 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the fixing cover. 3) Slide out the transfer drum frame. 4) Remove the two screws, and detach the fixing upper cover.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM 2. Mounting the Fixing Upper Cleaning Belt The feed shaft, take-up shaft, and belt (service part) are constructed as a single entity (service part). Mount the fixing upper cleaning belt by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind: 1) Wind the cleaning belt around the cleaning belt take-up shaft [1] two to three times. 2) Mount the feed shaft [2] of the cleaning belt as shown. 3) Put the lever [3] of the fixing upper cleaning belt length sensor inside.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM 3. Removing the Fixing Lower Cleaning Belt 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the fixing cover. 3) Slide out the transfer frame. 4) Detach the fixing unit. 5) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the two screws [2]; then, detach the fixing left cover. [1] [2] Figure 8-427 6) Disconnect the two connectors [3], and remove the two screws [4]; then, remove the fixing lower cleaning belt unit.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM 4. Mounting the Fixing Lower Cleaning Belt The feed shaft, take-up shaft, and cleaning belt (service part) are constructed as a single entity (service part). Mount the fixing lower cleaning belt by reversing the steps used to remove it and with the following mind: 1) Wind the cleaning belt around the cleaning belt take-up shaft [1] two to three times. 2) Mount the cleaning belt feed shaft [2] as shown.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM C. Oil Applying Assembly/ Removing Assembly [1] Caution: The oil applying unit is adjusted and assembled at the factory. Do not remove it. Especially, do not remove the screws [1] shown in the figure. [1] Figure 8-432 (rear) Reference: If you have replaced the oil felt, execute COPIER>OPTION>FIXING>PUMPON in service mode, and press the Stop key in about 10 min so as to impregnate the felt with fixing oil. [1] Figure 8-433 (front) 1.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM 2. 1) 2) 3) 4) Removing the Oil Fixing Blade Open the front cover. Remove the fixing cover. Slide to the transfer drum frame. Remove the fixing upper cover, and open the fixing upper roller unit. 5) Remove the oil applying felt. 6) Remove the four screws [1], and remove the fixing blade. Reference: The oil felt is symmetrical in shape when viewed from above. You may turn it over to use the other side. [1] Figure 8-435 D. Internal Delivery Assembly 1.
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM E. Drive Assembly 1. Removing the Fixing Motor (M5) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the screw, and open the CPU PCB. 3) Remove the fixing motor cover. (Pull it to the front while opening it upward and downward.) 4) Loosen the two screws [1]. 5) Disconnect the two connectors [2], and remove the two screws [3]; then, detach the fixing motor together with its PCB. [3] [2] [1] Figure 8-437 [A] 2.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECAHANISMS This chapter explains the operations and functions of the copier’s externals and control systems and the relationship between the electrical and mechanical systems, and provides an outline of the timing at which various associated parts are driven. I. CONTROL PANEL ......................9-1 A. Outline ....................................9-1 II. DOWNLOADING .........................9-2 A. Outline ....................................9-2 III. COUNTERS .............
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS I. CONTROL PANEL A. Outline The copier’s control panel consists of the PCBs shown in the figure and a liquid crystal display (LCD) capable of showing images in 640 x 240 dots. Inverter PCB LCD Touch panel Numeric keypad PCB Control panel Control panel PCB Pilot lamp • Monitors key input. • Controls buzzer sound. • Controls control panel LEDs. • Controls data communication. • Provides data (display data).
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS II. DOWNLOADING A. Outline The copier will provide the following functions when it is connected to a PC with a biCentronics interface. PCB CPU PCB Download Upload R flash memory R back-up RAM Yes No Yes Yes DC flash memory Yes No DC back-up RAM Yes Yes PANEL flash memory Yes No PANEL back-up RAM Yes Yes Table 9-201 The copier is switched between copying and downloading/uploading modes by the switch behind its inside cover.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS III. COUNTERS A. Outline The copier is equipped with counters which keep track of the number of copies it has made according to the type of copy paper. The counters appear in response to a press on the Check key on the control panel (from the top, counter 1, 2, 3, and so forth). The count is incremented upon detection of copy paper by the internal paper sensor (PS12; in the case of the Control Card V, by the pickup request signal from the reader unit).
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS IV. FANS A. Outline The names, the functions, and associated error codes of the fans used in the copier are as follows: Notation Name Function 2-speed control (voltage) Error code FM1 Original exposure system cooling fan 1 Cools the original exposure system. Yes (24/15V) E804-0101 FM2 Exhaust fan Discharges heat from inside. Yes (24/15V) E804-0003 FM3 Primary charging assembly fan Prevents soiling of the primary charging assembly.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS FM1 FM15 FM14 FM4 FM8 FM11 FM7 FM9 FM13 FM3 FM16 FM2 FM6 FM5 FM17 Figure 9-401 Arrangement of the Fans COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS B. Operations 1. 2-Speed Rotation Control The rotation of some of the fans used in the copier is controlled so that they operate at full speed (24 V) or half speed (15 V) in response to a switch of voltage by the voltage switching circuit of the respective fan. (Table 9-401) If an error occurs in the rotation of a fan, the copier indicates ‘E804’ on the control panel. To reset the copier, remove the cause, and turn on the power switch.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS V. POWER SUPPLY A. Supplying Power 1. Outline The copier is supplied with DC power by the DC power supply PCB, and the power is distributed as shown in Figure 9-501. Description Name DC power supply PCB (DCP1) Generates DC power from AC power, and protects against overcurrent. AC fuse PCB (UN22) Protects the drum heater, cassette heater, and deck heater from overcurrent. DC fuse PCB (UN29) Protects the DC power supply system from overcurrent.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 2.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS Leakage Noise breaker filter EL CB Transfer Transfer unit lever drawer connector switch SW3 Power supply switch LF1 SW1 Left front door switch SW4 Delivery door switch SW5 RL3 DC power cut relay 24 Transfer driver 5 PCB 24 24 DCP Unit: V Note: The thick indicates the AC line.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS B. Rated Outputs of the DC Power Supply PCB Table 9-503 shows the rated outputs of the DC power supply PCB and related power tolerances. Output 3.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS C. Protection System The fuse on the DC fuse PCB is designed to melt if an overcurrent occurs in any of the loads. Or, the overcurrent protection circuit on the DC power supply PCB will turn on to stop the output of the DC power supply.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS D. Backup Battery The copier’s CPU PCB is equipped with two lithium batteries to back up various data in the event of power failure (or when the power plug is disconnected). Battery (lithium) BAT1 (3V,1000mAh) BAT2 (3V,550mAh) Uses (backup description) Control value data for RCON and PANEL-CON. Data of service mode (ADJUST) related to the reader unit: alarm, jam, error history data. Control data for DC-CON.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS VI. EDITOR A. Outline The copier’s editor is of a type referred to as a static editor, consisting of a tablet which enables reading in horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) directions and a pen switch. The editor controller PCB reads points pressed by the pen switch as defining a selected area.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS Amplification Decoder X A/D conversion Vn-1 Vn Vn+1 Peak hold Decoder Y CPU Editor controller PCB Output (to copier) Figure 9-601 Detection Applies pulses to electrode wire (1, …, n-1, n, n+1). L= (n-1) X Voltage is maximum Vn at nth electrode wire. L : (n-1) : line interval. : line interval 1……n-1 Vn-1 n Vn-(Vn-1) Vn-(Vn+1) Computes x from data table. n+1 Obtains L x mm. +: between n and n+1. -: between n and n-1.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS C. Zero-Adjustment of Input Coordinates If you have replaced the editor controller PCB or the tablet, be sure to set the DIP switch on the controller PCB according to the label attached to the cable of the tablet (Figure 9-603 and -604). If a discrepancy still exists after setting the DIP switch, execute EDITOR>ADJUST>EDADJX,Y in service mode. Tablet Label Figure 9-603 Setting (SW)ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Figure 9-604 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS VII. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier’s parts while keeping the following in mind: 1. Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work. 2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS A. Covers 1.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 3. Left Inside Cover 1) Remove the four screws [1]. 2) Slide out the transfer drum frame, and remove the left inside cover [2]. [1] [2] [1] Figure 9-703 [3] [1] 4. Transfer Drum Frame Cover 1) Remove the transfer drum knob [1]. 2) Remove the two screws [2], and detach the transfer drum frame cover [3]. [2] 5. Fixing Assembly Cover 1) Remove the screw, and detach the fixing knob [1]. 2) Remove the two screws [2], and detach the fixing assembly cover [3].
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 6. Transfer Drum Frame Right Cover 1) Pull out the registration roller knob [1]. 2) Remove the three screws [2], and remove the transfer drum frame right cover [3]. [1] [2] Caution: When mounting the transfer drum frame right cover, be sure that the hook at the bottom of the cover is securely fitted in the hole in the transfer drum frame. [2] [3] Figure 9-706 7.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 8. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Upper Cover Remove the rear upper cover. Remove the control panel. Remove the three face plates [1] of the screw holes for the projector with a flatblade screwdriver. 4) Remove the copyboard glass [2]. [2] [1] Figure 9-707 5) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the vertical size plate [4]. [4] [3] Figure 9-708 6) Remove the two flat-head screws [5]. 7) Remove the nine screws [6], and detach the upper cover [7].
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS B. Control Panel 1. Removing the Control Panel 1) Remove the four screws [1]. 2) Disconnect the two connectors, and detach the control panel [2]. [1] [2] [1] Figure 9-710 2. Removing the Control Panel PCB 1) Turn over the control panel. 2) Disconnect the five connectors [1] of the control panel PCB. 3) Remove the five screws (M3x8) [2] and the screw (M3x4) [3]; then, detach the control panel PCB. [1] [2] [3] [1] [2] Figure 9-711 3.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the four screws [4]; then, detach the LCD PCB. [4] [3] [4] Figure 9-713 4. Removing the Numeric Keypad PCB 1) Remove the control panel PCB. 2) Remove the control panel fixing plate. 3) Remove the 13 screws [1], and remove the pilot lamp assembly [2]. 4) Remove the numeric keypad PCB [3]. [1] [3] [1] [2] [1] Figure 9-714 9-22 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS C. Editor 1. Removing the Editor Controller PCB 1) Remove the six face plates [1] used for screws. [1] [1] [1] Figure 9-715 2) Remove the two screws (M8x6), six screws (M8x10), and six screws (M8x23), a total of 14 screws; then, detach the copyboard cover. 3) Remove the two screws [2], and detach the controller PCB cover [3].
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS Caution: When mounting the editor control PCB, be sure to match the ON/OFF notations of the switches [1] and [2] on the PCB by referring to the switch settings indicated on the flat cable. [2] [1] Figure 9-718 2. Removing the Editor Mirror 1) Remove the six face plates for screws. 2) Remove the two screws (M8x8), six screws (M8x10), and six screws (M8x28), a total of 14 screws; then, detach the copyboard cover.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS D. Flywheel 1. Removing the Flywheel Caution: The copier’s flywheel weighs a total of 13 kg, consisting of a 8-kg flywheel and a 5-kg flywheel. Take full care not to drop it, and be sure to hold it on its right and left as shown when handling it. 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Turn the flywheel counterclockwise so that it is as shown in the figure. Figure 9-720 Caution: Do NOT turn the flywheel clockwise.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS E. Fans [1] [1] 1. Outline The copier is equipped with 14 fan motors to circulate air inside it, thereby preventing overheating.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS F. Drive System Belt Layout The copier’s drive belts include the following: [1] belt for the developing assembly, registration roller, attraction roller, and photosensitive drum cleaner [2] belt for the multifeeder pickup assembly [2] [1] Figure 9-724 G. Drum Motor Assembly 1. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) [1] [2] Removing the Drum Motor (M2) Remove the photosensitive drum unit. Remove the rear cover. Remove the flywheel. Remove the potential control PCB.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7) Disconnect the connector A [4], and shift the lamp regulator unit slightly to the front, and disconnect the connector B [5] and connector C [6]; then, detach the lamp regulator PCB. [6] [4] [5] Figure 9-727 [7] [7] 8) Remove the three screws [7], and detach the duct [8] of the primary charging assembly fan. 9) Remove the three screws, and disconnect the connector; then, detach the primary charging assembly fan.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 11) Remove the static eliminator brush. 12) Disconnect the two connectors [12], and remove the seven screws [13]; then, detach the drum motor assembly [14] together with the fixing plate. 13) Remove the four screws, and detach the drum motor from the mounting plate. [13] [13] [12] [13] [14] [13] [13] Figure 9-730 2.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 4) Temporarily secure the drum motor assembly [7] to the copier with seven screws [8]. [8] [8] [8] [7] [8] [8] Figure 9-733 5) Mount the drum shaft positioning tool [9] to the photosensitive drum frame unit with the two screws [10] removed in step 2). 6) Secure the drum motor assembly in place with seven screws.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS H. Main Motor (M4) Drive Assembly 1. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Removing the Main Motor (M4) Remove the rear over. Remove the flywheel. Open the CPU PCB. Remove the back suction fan [1]. Remove the six screws [2], and detach the drive assembly reinforcing plate [3]. [2] [2] [1] [2] [3] [2] Figure 9-735 6) While lifting the tension plate [4] by hand, detach the drive belt 1 [5].
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS I. CPU PCB 1. Removing the CPU PCB Check and record the data values of ADJUST and OPTION in service mode before starting replacement work. 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Disconnect all connectors. 3) Remove the eight screws [1], and detach the CPU PCB [2]. [1] [1] [2] [1] Figure 9-738 2. Replacing the CPU PCB 1) Check and record the data values of ADJUST and OPTION in service mode. Or, back up the data using the downloading tool. 2) Remove the CPU PCB.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 2) Remove the old flash memory PCB from the CPU PCB. 3) Mount the new flash memory to the CPU PCB. 4) Turn on the power switch. 5) Select FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC-CON and R-CON in service mode, and set them to ‘1’. 6) Enter the data values recorded in step 1). 7) Execute FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ in service mode. COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS / AUXILIARY MECHANISMS J. HVT PCB 1. 1) 2) 3) Removing the HVT PCB Remove the rear cover. Disconnect all eight connectors. Remove the four screws [1], and detach the HVT-DC PCB [2]. [1] [1] [1] [2] [1] Figure 9-739 [3] 4) Disconnect all connectors. 5) Remove the three connectors [3], and detach the HVT-AC PCB [4]. [3] [4] [3] Figure 9-740 K. Developing Bias PCB 1. Removing the Developing Bias PCB 1) Remove the delivery assembly.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK This chapter explains the operations and functions of the mechanisms used to pick up paper from the paper deck and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems, and provides an outline of timing at which various associated parts are driven. I. PAPER DECK .......................... 10-1 A. Inputs to and Outputs from the Deck Driver ........... 10-1 B. Pickup ................................. 10-4 C. Detecting Paper in the Deck .................................... 10-7 D.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK I. PAPER DECK A. Inputs to and Outputs from the Deck Driver Inputs to the Deck Driver (1/2) Deck driver PCB Deck pickup sensor J17 -1 -2 PS101 -3 J15 -5 -4 -3 J5 +5V -B5 -B4 DPFDD -B3 Deck paper absent sensor J11 -1 -2 PS102 -3 J10 -4 -3 -2 -A5 -A4 -A3 Deck lifter upper limit sensor Deck lifer position sensor J13 -1 -2 PS103 -3 J14 -1 -2 PS104 -3 When PS101 detects copy paper, '1'. (When the light-blocking plate is at PS101.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK Inputs to the Deck Driver (2/2) Deck driver PCB SW100 Deck open switch LED100 Deck open indicator SW101 Deck open detecting switch N.O. SW102 Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch N.O. J20 -1 J5 -B11 -2 -B10 -3 -B9 -4 -B8 When SW100 is pushed as the deck is opened, '0'. DOLON* '0' when the deck is being opened/closed, '0'. (LED remains on or flashes while the deck lifter motor is rotating.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK Inputs to the Deck Driver (1/1) Deck driver PCB -2 Deck pickup motor Deck lifter motor -6 -5 DPUMA* -4 DPUMB +24V -3 -1 DPUMB* PM101 J22 J27 -1 M101 -2 -9 -10 J18 -1 CL102 -2 -11 -12 Deck pickup clutch Deck pickup solenoid Deck open solenoid J16 -2 SL101 -1 J28 -2 SL102 -1 DPUMA +24V J15 J15 -1 -2 See p. 10-14. J4 -9 -10 See p. 10-15. J5 24V -B6 -B7 DPUCD* When '0, CL102 turns on. -B1 -B2 24VU DPRSD* When '0', SL101 turns on.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK B. Pickup 1. Outline The paper deck (hereafter, “deck”) is capable of accommodating as many as 2500 sheets of copy paper (A4, LTR, B5; 105 g/m2) at one time, and is designed to feed copy paper in response to control signals from its host copier’s DC-CPU. The lifter of the deck is driven by the deck lifter motor (M101), and the deck picks up and feeds copy paper using the drive from the deck pickup motor (PM101). 2.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK DC-CPU Copier PM101 Deck pickup solenoid drive signal (DPRSD*) Deck main motor drive signal Deck pickup paper detection signal (DKPPD) Deck pickup clutch drive signal (DPUCD*) Side deck driver PCB PS101 CL102 SL101 Figure 10-104 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 3. Sequence of Operations (pickup) DSRDY INTR Photosensitive drum revolution 1 2 COPY 3 Transfer drum revolution 1 2 3 4 4 Deck pickup motor (PM101) Deck pickup clutch (SL102) Deck pickup solenoid (SL101) Deck pickup sensor (PS101) Figure 10-105 10-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK C. Detecting Paper in the Deck 1. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper The presence/absence of copy paper inside the deck is detected by the deck paper absent sensor (PS102). When copy paper runs out and, as a result, the paper detecting lever of the pickup roller assembly leaves the deck paper absent sensor, the copier will indicate the Add Paper message on the control panel.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 2. Switching the Deck Paper Size The deck copy paper size may be changed by moving the guide plate inside the deck and then entering the new paper size in service mode (OPTION>ACC>DK-P) at time of installation or at the request of the user. 3.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK D. Deck Lifter 1. Lifter Movement The lifter of the deck is connected to a reel by means of a cable, and is driven by the deck lifter motor (M101). The lifter is moved up or down by changing the direction of motor rotation. When the deck (compartment) is slid into the copier, the deck open detecting switch (SW101) is pushed; thereafter, the lifter starts to move up when the deck open sensor (PS109) detects the light-blocking plate.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK Deck open detecting switch (SW101) Deck paper level upper Deck pickup sensor (PS107) PM101 motor Deck lifter position sensor (PS104) Deck pickup roller Deck paper level lower sensor (PS108) Deck lifter motor Deck lifter upper Deck open limit sensor switch (SW100) (PS103) Deck pickup/feed roller M101 Deck separation roller Deck lifter cable Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW102) Lifter Copy paper Figure 10-107 10-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 2. Paper Level Indicator on the Deck Front Cover The drive of the deck lifter motor (M101) is received by a coupling and transmitted to a rack by means of a belt. The rack is equipped with a black belt, which moves up and down within a display window in the deck front cover in keeping with the movement of the rack.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK E. Opening/Closing the Deck (compartment) 1. Deck Opening/Closing Movement When the deck open switch (SW100) is pushed, the deck open solenoid (SL102) turns on to release the deck (compartment), causing the deck to move to the front by the force of a spring. At the same time, the deck lifter motor (M101) starts to rotate, and the lifter inside the deck will start to move down.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 2.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK F. Controlling the Deck Motors 1 Controlling the Deck Pickup Motor (PM101) The deck pickup motor is a stepping motor controlled by the copier’s DC-CPU. The deck pickup motor is turned on and off by controlling the output of the pulse signals from the copier (DPUMA, DPUMA*, DPUMB, DPUMB*); on the other hand, the deck pickup motor is kept on hold by causing the deck pickup motor hold signal to go ‘1’.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 2. Controlling the Deck Lifter Motor (M101) The deck lifter motor control circuit is found on the side deck driver PCB. (See Figure 8-112 for its block diagram.) The combination circuit found in the diagram consists of various logic circuits, and the deck lifter motor is rotated forward and in reverse according to combinations of the states of the deck lifter motor drive signal (DLMON*) and the deck lifter up signal (DLFUP*) from the copier’s DCCPU and the output signals from sensors.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK Deck open detecting switch (SW101) Deck open detection signal (DOPD) 24V 24V 24V M101 Deck lifter motor lower limit drive signal Deck lifter motor upper limit drive signal DCCPU Deck lifter motor Motor drive circuit Deck open signal (DOPEN*) Deck lifter upper limit detection signal (DLFUL) Deck open switch (SW100) PS103 Deck lifter upper limit sensor Combination circuit Deck open detection signal (DOPND*) Deck lifter position detection signal (DLFPD) Deck lifter motor dr
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK II. DETECTING JAMS A. Outline The side paper deck is equipped with the sensor shown in Figure 10-201 to monitor the movement of copy paper. A jam is identified by reading signals from the sensor at such times as programmed in advance in the copier’s DC-CPU. When the DC-CPU identifies a jam, it will discharge all paper moving ahead of the jam, stop the ongoing operation, and then indicate jam removal instructions on its control panel.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK The copier’s DC-CPU identifies a jam under the following conditions: · Copy paper is found over the deck pickup sensor (PS101) when the copier’s power switch is turned on, at the end of the wait period, or during standby. Deck Pick/Up/Vertical Delay Jam Copy Start key ON Jam indicator ON COPY INTR Deck pickup clutch (CL102) Jam check Deck pickup sensor (PS101) Normal Error Deck pickup motor (PM101) Figure 10-202 10-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier’s parts while keeping the following in mind: 1. Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work. 2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK [7] A. External Covers [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Deck releasing grip Front upper cover Compartment open/close switch Front cover Right cover Upper cover Rear cover [1] [2] [6] [3] [5] [4] Figure 10-301 1. Removing the Front Cover 1) Disconnect the deck from the copier, and push down the latch plate [2] of the compartment [1] to open the compartment [1].
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK Caution: When mounting the front cover to the deck, be sure to mach the coupling used to indicate the level of paper. Caution: Mount the front cover so that the gap between the front cover and the front upper cover is 3 ±1 mm. Match.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 2. Removing the Rear Cover 1) Disconnect the deck from the copier, and remove the six screws [1]; then, detach the rear cover [2]. (The screw [1a] has a washer.) [1] [1a] [1] [1] [1] Figure 10-307 [2] 3. Removing the Right Cover 1) Open the compartment, and remove the screws [1]; then, move the right cover [2] to the front to detach. (The screw [1a] has a washer.) [1] [1] [1a] Figure 10-308 [2] 4. Removing the Upper Cover 1) Remove the rear cover.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK [3] 3) Remove the three screws [3], and disconnect the connector [4]; then, detach the front upper cover [5]. [4] [5] Figure 10-310 [7] [6] 4) Remove the two screws [6], and detach the upper cover [7]. Figure 10-311 B. Paper Deck - Related Work [2] 8 cm (approx.) 1. Removing the Deck from the Copier 1) Place copy paper or the like [3] (about 8 cm high) on the floor for placement of the deck [2] (to prevent deformation of the roll support plate [1]).
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 2) Remove the right cover. 3) Remove the four screws [4], and detach the deck [5] from the deck mount [6]. (left) [6] [4] [5] (right) [4] Figure 10-313 4) Holding the deck [7] as shown, place it on the base prepared in step 1). [7] Figure 10-314 10-24 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK [2] 8 cm (approx.) 2. Removing the Compartment 1) Place copy paper or the like [3] (about 8 cm high) on the floor for placement of the deck [2] (to prevent deformation of the roll support [1]). [3] [3] [1] Figure 10-315 2) Disconnect the deck from the copier, and push down the latch plate [5] of the compartment [4] to open the compartment [4]. [5] (rear) [4] Figure 10-316 [6] 3) Remove the right cover.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 5) Remove the screw [8] and the stopper plate [9]; then, slide the compartment [10] farther to the front. [9] [8] [10] Figure 10-318 [12] 6) Remove the three screws [12] each from the left and right of the compartment rails [11]; then, lift the compartment slightly, and detach it to the front. 7) Place the compartment on the base prepared in step 1). [11] [12] Figure 10-319 3.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 3) Remove the screw [3], and mount the paper rear end guide plate [4] to suit the new paper size. (Do not mount it if for LTR.) 4) Likewise, remove the screw [5], and mount the left/right guide plate [6] to suit the new paper size. 5) Set the new paper size in the copier’s service mode (OPTION>ACC>DK-P). [4] [3] [5] [6] Figure 10-321 4. Adjusting the Deck Registration If the left/right registration (0 ±2.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK C. Drive System 1. Removing the Deck Pickup Clutch (CL102) 1) Remove the deck pickup unit. (p. 10-34) 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the E-ring [2]; then, detach the deck pickup clutch [3]. Caution: When mounting the pickup clutch, be sure to put the clutch in the slip stop [4]. Be sure also to hook the harness on the U groove [5] of the guide. [1] [3] [4] [2] [5] Figure 10-324 2.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 3. Removing the Deck Lifter Motor (M101) 1) Open the compartment of the deck, and remove all copy paper. 2) Turn on the copier. If the lifter of the deck is in up position, press the sensor lever [1] of the paper supply position inside the compartment to stop the lifter about 7 cm from the bottom of the compartment base plate. Then, insert a hex wrench into the hole of the lifter drive shaft [3] to hold it in place (against turning). [1] [4] 7c m (ap pro x.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 4. Removing the Lifter Cable (front of the deck) 1) Open the compartment of the deck, and remove all copy paper. 2) Remove the screw, and detach the paper rear guide plate from the inside of the compartment.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 6) Remove the coupling [5] and the E-ring [6]; then, detach the pulley cover [7]. 7) Remove the two screws [8] and the cable fixing plate [9] on the left side; then, detach the lifter cable [10] on the outside. 8) Remove the two screws [11] and the cable fixing plate [12] on the right side; then, detach the lifter cable [13] on the inside.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 4) Remove the compartment. 5) Remove the screw [3], and detach the sensor covers upper and lower [4]. [3] [4] Figure 10-332 [6] 6) Disconnect the four connectors [5], and remove the six screws [6]; then, detach the metal plate [7]. [6] [6] [7] [6] [5] 7) Insert a hex wrench [9] or the like into the hole of the lifter drive shaft [8] to hold it in position (against turning).
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 8) Remove the five screws [10], and detach the lifter motor unit [11]. [10] [10] [11] Figure 10-335 6. Routing the Lifter Cable 1) Check to make sure that the lifter drive shaft and the lifter are held in position with a hex wrench [1] and long screwdrivers [2] as shown. 2) Secure the cable fixing plate [3] to the lifter with two screws. 3) Hook the lifter cable on the upper pulley [4].
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK D. Feeding System 1. Removing the Deck Pickup Unit 1) Remove the upper cover. 2) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and remove the five screws [2]. 3) Remove the deck pickup unit [3]. [1] [2] [3] [2] [2] [2] Figure 10-337 Caution: When mounting the deck pickup unit [3], be sure to tighten the three screws shown in the figure first. [3] Screws Figure 10-338 [2] 2. Removing the Deck Pickup Roller 1) Remove the deck pickup unit.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 3. Orientation of the Deck Pickup Roller When mounting the deck pickup roller [1] at the front, be sure that the marking [2] on the collar (silver-colored) is at the front and the marking [3] on the side of the roller is at the rear.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 4. Removing the Deck Pickup/Feed Roller 1) Remove the deck pickup unit. 2) Turn over the deck pickup unit. 3) Remove the resin ring [1], and remove the deck pickup/feed roller [2] and the drive belt [3] to the front. [2] [3] [1] Figure 10-342 5. Orientation of the Deck Pickup/ Feed Roller When mounting the deck pickup/feed roller [1], be sure that the belt pulley [2] is at the front.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 2) Remove the joint, and remove the deck separation roller [3]. [3] Caution: The urethane sponge used on the deck separation roller is initially pink in color, and changes to orange and to yellow over time. This phenomenon is accelerated when the sponge is exposed to light, and is a general characteristic of urethane sponge. There is no difference in performance, and the part is not identified by color. Figure 10-345 7.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 8. Position of the Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL101) Take note of the positions of the two fixing screws [2] on the solenoid [1] with reference to the graduations on the support plate before removing the solenoid. Or, mark the position of the solenoid with a scriber on the support plate. If you are mounting the solenoid on its own, be sure to secure it in place where it was before removal. [2] [1] Figure 10-347 E. Electrical System 1.
CHAPTER 10 PAPER DECK 2. Removing the Deck Open Switch PCB 1) Disconnect the deck from the copier, and push the latch plate [2] of the compartment [1] to open the compartment [1]. [2] (rear) [1] Figure 10-349 2) Remove the three screws [3], and disconnect the connector [4]; then, detach the front upper cover [5]. [3] [4] [5] Figure 10-350 3) Remove the two screws [6], and detach the deck open switch PCB [7].
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION This chapter explains how to install the copier and its accessories. I. II. SELECTING THE SITE ............ 11-1 INSTALLATION ........................ 11-4 A. Unpacking ........................... 11-4 B. Removing the Fixing Materials and Mounting the Waste Toner Collection Case ................... 11-7 C. Supplying Fixing Oil ............ 11-9 D. Mounting the Drum Cleaner and Setting the Environment Switch ................................ 11-11 E. Supplying Toner ................
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION I. SELECTING THE SITE The site of installation must satisfy the following; if possible, visit the user’s before the delivery of the machine: 1. There must be a power outlet that may be used exclusively for the copier. It must offer the rated voltage (±10%), and must allow grounding of the copier. 2. The temperature must be between 15°/59° and 30°C/86°F, and the humidity must be between 5% and 80%. Avoid an area near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier, and refrigerator.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 6. There must be at least 100 cm /39 in from any wall, providing adequate space for maintenance work. See the following figures for spatial requirements. Copier Only Copier 100 cm/ 39 in min. 100 cm/39 in min. 100 cm/39 in min. 320 cm/126 in min. 100 cm/ 39 in min. ■ 280 cm/110 in min. Figure 11-102 Copier + Stapler Sorter-F1, Buffer Path Unit 1 + Paper Deck-E1 160 cm/63 in min. Copier 190 cm/63 in min. 100 cm/ 39 in min. 320 cm/126 in min. 100 cm/ 39 in min.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 7. If multiple copies exist, arrange them so that the exhaust from one will not directly be drawn into another. In addition, avoid installing the machine near the air vent of the room. In general, the silicone gas (vaporized silicone oil from the fixing assembly) generated by a copier tends to soil its corona charging wire, shortening its life. Keep in mind that this phenomenon is particularly conspicuous in a low-humidity environment.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION II. INSTALLATION When a piece of metal is brought from a cold to warm place, droplets of water tend to form on its surface. This phenomenon is known as condensation, and a copier suffering from condensation tends to produce blank copies. If you have brought in the copier from a cold to warm place, leave it alone for at least an hour so that it will become used to the new environment before unpacking it. A. Unpacking 1) Unpack the copier.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 4) Working in a group of two, lift the delivery side (copier’s left) about 5 cm, and remove the cushioning material in the direction of the arrow. Figure 11-202 5) Lift the pickup side and the delivery side in turns to remove the plastic bag. 6) Working in a group of two, lift the pickup side (copier’s right), and pull out the cardboard to slide out the slope plates. Skid Slope plate Figure 11-203 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 7) Detach the two pins taped to the skid, and arrange the slope plates, and secure them in place with the pins. Be sure that each slope plate is placed so that the boss at the center faces down. Slope plates Figure 11-204 8) Slide down the copier from the skid. (Position one person to support from below while the other pushes from above.) 9) Open the cardboard box, and take out the parts and materials. Take out the M, C, Y, and Bk starter bottles, and shake them well.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION B. Removing the Fixing Materials and Mounting the Waste Toner Collection Case 1) Remove the packaging tape, and remove the protective sheet of the copyboard glass. 2) Peel off the tape from the metal fixing of the scanner found on the outside of the left cover; then, slide the metal fixing from rear to the front and then to the left to detach. · You will use the metal fixing when relocating the copier; store it away to the right of the waste toner collection case.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 9) Press the release button, and slide out all the cassettes and the duplexing tray (CLC1150); then, open the waste toner collection case cover. Remove the two screws, and detach the handle found at the left front (bottom); then, fit it to the screw hole found to the right of the waste toner collection case using the removed screws. (You will be using the handle when relocating the copier.) 10) Set the waste toner collection case. · Be sure that the plastic bag is dilated.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION C. Supplying Fixing Oil Transfer drum knob 1) Remove the transfer drum knob, and remove the two screws; then, detach the transfer unit cover, and remove the fixing material from within. Screw Transfer unit Screw cover Figure 11-209 2) Remove the screw, and detach the stopper of the transfer drum. Stopper Screw Figure 11-210 3) Remove the cap from the fixing oil tank.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 5) Pour all fixing oil into the tank. 6) Fit the caps of the fixing oil tank. Figure 11-212 7) Turn the gear assembly of the transfer drum counterclockwise with your fingers so that it is as shown. Shift the levers of the attraction brush and the transfer blade to the left to lock the brush and the blade in position. Caution: You will hear clicks when you rotate the lever counterclockwise. It is a normal condition, provided to prevent reverse rotation during operation.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION D. Mounting the Drum Cleaner and Setting the Environment Switch Screws 1) Remove the two screws, and remove the two slide stoppers of the hopper (toner box) unit. 2) While pushing down the hopper stopper, slide out the hopper unit, and turn it toward the front. Figure 11-214 3) Disconnect the connector (yellow harness) on the right side, and free its harness from the edge saddle; then, remove the screw, and pull the black toner concentration sensor straight out.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 4) Apply drum cleaner lubricant evenly along the No. 2 blade (front, rear). · Be sure to shake the drum cleaner lubricant container well before application. · Be sure to apply the lubricant to the face, back, as well the edge. · Be sure to apply the lubricant as if to tap lightly on the edge. Do not rub it so as to avoid chipping the edge. 5) Dry wipe the sensor face of the black toner concentration sensor. · Do not use alcohol. No. 2 blade (front) No.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 8) Wrap lint-free paper around your finger, and apply drum cleaner lubricant evenly along the blade of the photosensitive drum cleaner. · Be sure to apply evenly. Otherwise, vertical white lines may appear on copy images. · Be sure to apply on all surfaces in addition to the edge except the bottom surfaces. · Do not apply as if to rub it so as to avoid chipping the edge. Use light, tapping strokes.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 11) Mount the cover and the knob; then, set the transfer unit inside the copier. 12) Remove the four screws, and mount the left lower cover. Screw Figure 11-220 13) Shift the environment switch (upper, black) to the ON position. · It is set to OFF at time of shipment from the factory. · Keep the cassette heater switch (lower, gray) at OFF. Environment switch ON OFF Figure 11-221 14) Mount the left lower cover with four screws. 11-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION E. Supplying Toner 1) Close the left front cover, and insert the door switch actuator into the right door switch. Right door switch 2) Insert the control key. 3) Connect the power plug, and turn on the power switch. Figure 11-222 Caution: Make sure that the power is as rated (±10%). COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 4) Place copy paper on the floor under the hopper (open), and fit the hopper stoppers into the four supply mouths found in the bottom of the hopper. Figure 11-223 5) Shake the Bk toner bottle up and down as shown 20 times or more. Caution: Do not shake the bottle until immediately before setting it to the hopper. Check to make sure that the toner has not caked. Figure 11-224 11-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 6) Remove the cap of the Bk toner hopper, and fit the Bk toner bottle into the mouth of the hopper; then, holding the base of the bottle, turn it clockwise about 10º. Figure 11-225 7) Open the slide shutter of the Bk toner bottle, and tap lightly on the bottom and the side of the bottle two to three times. Check to make sure that all toner has fallen into the hopper. Figure 11-226 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 8) Close the slide shutter of the Bk toner bottle, and turn the bottle counterclockwise about 10° to detach. Check to make sure that no toner remains on the mesh of the hopper mouth; otherwise, tap on the mesh so that the toner falls inside the hopper. Figure 11-227 9) Supply, C, and Y toners in the same way. 10) Press the following keys on the control panel in sequence to start service mode: · · 2, 8 (Press these two keys at the same time.) · 11) Press ‘COPIER’.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 12) Press ‘FUNCTION’. 13) Press ‘INSTALL’. 14) Press ‘HP-STR-4’. Caution: Be sure to wait until the indication on the control panel is ‘READY’ before executing HP-STR-4 in service mode. 15) Press ‘OK’. 16) Wait until the toner (4 colors) inside the hopper has been stirred fully (about 2 min). F. Supplying the Starter Developer 1) Press ‘SPLY-K’. Caution: Be sure to wait until the indication on the control panel is ‘READY’ before executing SPLY-K in service mode. 2) Press ‘OK’.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 3) See that the developing assembly is locked in position and the screw inside it starts to rotate (about 10 sec). Caution: Be sure to wait until the selected developing assembly is locked in position. 4) Fit the starter developer supply funnel that comes with the copier* in the supply mouth of the developing assembly, and hold it in place. * Do not use the supply funnel, whose mouth is too small. · Be sure to try one color at one time.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 7) Supply M, C, and Y starter developers by repeating steps 1) through 6). (Press SPLY-M, SPLY-C, or SPLY-Y accordingly.) 8) Turn the hopper unit slowly, and push down the hopper stopper so that the roll on the left of the hopper is on the rail. Here, do NOT push in the hopper unit to lock it in position as yet. Caution: Do no handle the hopper unit roughly. Otherwise, large amounts of toner will drop from the hopper assembly. 9) Press ‘STIR-4’.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 12) Press ‘OK’. 13) Change the cassette size to suit the user’s needs while ATR is taking place (about 10 min). See H. “Changing the Cassette Paper Size.” 14) Detach the hopper cap, by pulling it slowly in horizontal direction. Caution: If you pull on the hopper cap at an angle, the seal of the hopper cap will become damaged, resulting chips falling into the developing assembly. Take adequate care. 15) Press ‘ADJUST’. 16) Press ‘DENS’.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 18) Press the Reset key twice, and remove the door switch actuator. 19) Mount the two slide stoppers of the hoppe unit. 20) Close the left and right front covers. G. Checking the Images and Operations 1) Slide out the cassette. 2) Put copy paper in the cassette. 3) Attach the Free Paper Size label to the universal type cassette. Free Paper Size label Figure 11-231 4) Remove the cassette size plate, and attach the side label indicating the appropriate paper size.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 6) Slide the cassette into the copier. 7) Press the key. 8) Press ‘adjust/clean’. key (auto gradation 9) Press the correction), and perform the instructions on the control panel to execute auto gradation correction. Caution: Before generating test prints, be sure that paper of B4 or larger is set. 10) Set a test sheet on the copyboard, and check the images produced by trying all cassettes as the source of paper. (In the case of the CLC1150, try the duplexing tray also.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 11) Make copies using the multifeeder. 12) Check the external covers for scratches and deformation. Caution: Check to make sure that copying operation is normal. 13) Clean up the area around the copier. 14) Move the copier to its site of installation, and secure it in place using the adjuster. Caution: Check to make sure that the copier is more or less level. 15) Fill out the service sheet. H. Changing the Cassette Paper Size 1) Slide out the cassette.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 6) Slide the cassette into the copier. 7) Start service mode, and enter the new paper size by selecting COPIER>OPTION>CST>P-SZ-C1 or P-SZ-C2. (You need not perform this step in the case of the universal cassette.) 8) Turn off and then on the power switch. Caution: Be sure to end INIT-4 before performing this step. After completing the foregoing work, install the various accessories as necessary. COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 3) Holding the grip of the side guide plate, move the side guide plate up to the appropriate side index. Side guide plate Cover Grip Figure 11-232 4) Mount the cover of the side guide plate. (You need not perform this step in the case of the universal cassette.) 5) Remove the screw of the rear guide plate, and relocate the rear guide plate to the appropriate size index. (In the case of the universal cassette, slide the rear end guide plate to the appropriate size index.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION III. RELOCATING THE COPIER If you must relocate the copier by truck or other means of transportation after installation, perform the following work: 1) Remove the sorter, film projector, document holder, and paper deck from the copier, and pack them separately. 2) Fit the scanner metal fixing. Put the metal fixing [1] against the hole in the delivery assembly, and slide it from the front to the rear to secure the scanner mirror base in place.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 6) Remove the two screws [2] (for the metal fixing on the bottom of the oil tank). 7) Remove the screw [3], and detach the oil tank fixing plate [4]. 8) Pick the hook with your fingers, and detach the oil level sensor [5]. 9) Remove the hose [6]. (At this time, oil will drop. Be sure to use a paper rag or the like.) 10) Lift the fixing unit, and remove the oil tank. 11) Empty the oil tank of silicone oil. 12) Put back the parts by performing steps 5) through 11) in reverse.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION IV. MOUNTING THE DOCUMENT HOLDER 1) Peel the face stickers [1] found on the right or the left of the copier, and fit the stepped screws [2]. 2) Fit the document holder [4] on the stepped screws, and secure it in place with screws [3]. [4] [2] [3] [1] Figure 11-401 Copier Right [4] [2] [3] [1] Figure 11-402 Copier Left 11-30 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION V. INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD UNIT-V 1. Mounting the Control Card Unit 1) Open the copier’s front cover, and remove the four screws [1] used to secure the control panel in place. 2) Disconnect the two connectors (J901, J961), and detach the control panel [2]. [1] [2] [1] Figure 11-501 [4] [5] [4] 3) Remove the mounting screw [3] of the face cover. 4) Disengage the claws [4], and detach the face plate [5] from the card slot.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 8) Remove the shorting connector [8], and connect the connector [9] (4-pin) of the control card unit. (The connector on the copier side is found under the control panel.) [8] [9] Figure 11-504 9) Secure the grounding wire [10] of the control card to the opening under the copier’s control panel. (The opening is found to the left of the connector of the primary charging assembly.) [10] Figure 11-505 10) Peel off the protective sheet from the nameplate of the control card unit.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION VI. INSTALLING THE COPY DATA CONTROLLER-A1 Note: The Copy Data Controller-A1 is not available in certain sales areas. 1. Setting the Board 1) Remove the two screws [2], and detach the top cover [1]. [2] [1] [2] Figure 11-601 Bit Position SW1 1~3 OFF 4 5 6 SW5 1 2 3 4 5,6 *1: Description Remarks Use it for normal operation. ON Use it for IPC communication. OFF Use for serial communication. ON Use it if a central control device is used.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 2) Set the DIP switches (SW1, SW5) on the copy data controller to suit the needs of the user. a. Set the DIP switch SW1-4 to suit the type of copier. b. If group control is planned, set the DIP switch (SW5-2): i.e., to control ABconfigured papers (A3, A4, B4, B5), keep the bit at OFF; to control inchconfigured papers (1x17, LTR, LGL, STMT), keep the bit at ON. c. If no group control is planned, keep bit 4 of the DIP switch (SW5-4) at OFF.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION A: If the Communication Control BoardA1 or the Interface Board-B1 is to be connected (requires the Power Supply-A1), JB2 JB1 Figure 11-604 JA1 B: If the Communication Control BoardA1 or the Interface Board-B1 is not to be connected (does not require the Power Supply-A1), 2. Installing to the Copier When installing the copy data controller to the copier, keep the following in mind: 1. Be sure to comply with the laws and regulations of the country. 2.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 2) Connect the 8-pin connector [3] of the unit with the copier’s 8-pin connector [4]. [3] [4] Figure 11-607 3) If you are installing the Card Reader-A1, connect the 9-pin relay cable or the card reader connected to the connector J4 of the unit with the copier’s 9-pin connector. J4 Cable for card reader Figure 11-608 11-36 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 4) Secure the unit [5] where the face plate of the copier’s rear cover is found with four screws [6]. [5] [6] [6] Figure 11-609 [2] 3. Checking Operations 1) If you are not connecting the Communication Control Board-A1 or the Interface Board-B1 (does not require the Power Supply-A1), go to step 4). Connect the connector [1] of the Power Supply-A1 with the connector [2] of the copy data controller securely as shown. Be sure that the cord is in the groove of the board.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 3) Turn on the copier’s main switch, and check to make sure that LED 2 of the copy data controller flashes. Make one copy, and check to make sure that LED3 flashes during copying operation.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 3) Turn on the copier’s main switch, and check to make sure that LED 2 of the copy data controller flashes. Make one copy, and check to make sure that LED3 flashes during copying operation.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 6) Connect the connector [3] of the Numeric Keypad-A1 to the connector J3 [4] of the copy data controller. [4] [3] Figure 11-615 SW2 7) Press the switch (SW2) on the copy data controller to start service mode. LED1 LED2 LED3 ???????????? SW2 SW3 EPROM SRAM LED4 LED5 LED6 JC5 CPU 1 SW1 ON 6 JB2 JA2 JB1 JC6 J5 6 JA1 JC8 JC9 IPC 1 SW4 SW5 ON Figure 11-616 8) Set the input method. a) Set the card/ID input using the Numeric Keypad-A1.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION d) To change to card input, When ‘MANAGE=ID’ has appeared, press ‘1’, and then press ‘ENT’. MANAGE=CARD’ appears. Code Input method 1 Card 2 ID Table 11-602 Caution: 1. If bit 4 of the DIP switch (SW5-4) on the copy data controller is set to OFF, group control is disabled, and an exclamation mark will appear (Figure 11-617). 2. If the copier’s memory has been used for ID input, the stored ID numbers may be used as ID numbers for the copy data controller.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION d) Set the DIP switch (SW1) on the copy data controller as indicated in Table 11-604. At this time, LED5 turns off. SW1 Bit Position 1,2,3 OFF Table 11-604 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED1 LED2 LED3 SW2 SW3 LED4 LED5 LED6 JA1 LED5 JB2 JA2 JB1 6 1 6 SW1 ON SW4 1 SW5 ON SW1-3 SW1-2 SW1-1 SW4 Figure 11-618 9) Set the control method. a) Use the Numeric Keypad-A1 to select the control method as follows: Press and so that ‘FORMAT=1’ appears.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 2. When ‘FORMAT=3-’ has appeared, press ‘ESC’. 3. ‘FORMAT=3-’ appears, and the cursor flashes for a while, during which formatting takes plate. At the end, the control method number is set to ‘3’. Caution: When the control method number has been changed, data on unit price, upper limit, counter, and ID numbers are gone; enter the data as necessary.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION EX. To change B4 for control paper size to LGL, / so that ‘SIZE3=B4’ 1. Press appears. 2. Look for the code for LGL in the conversion table (Table 11-606), and enter it (i.e., 1 and 3). 3. ‘SIZE3=13’ appears. 4. Press ‘ENT’. 5. ‘SIZE=3LGL’ appears to indicate that the change has been stored. Caution 1. You cannot set the same paper size code for different size fields (SIZE 1 through 4). 2. The counter readings will remain intact after the change. c.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 11) Check the settings of the DIP switches: a. Shift bit 3 of the DIP switch (SW5-3) on the copy data controller to OFF. b. Press / so that the settings of the DIP switches (SW1, SW5) on the copy data controller will appear. S1 S5 SW1-1 SW1-3 SW1-5 SW5-1 SW5-3 SW5-5 SW1-2 SW1-4 SW1-6 SW5-2 SW5-4 SW5-6 : indicates that the bit is at ON. : indicates that the bit is at OFF. Figure 11-619 SW2 LED1 LED2 LED3 ???????????? SW2 SW3 SRAM LED4 LED5 LED6 EPROM c.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 12) Attach the Switch Settings label [6] to the top cover [5], and record the settings of the switches on the label. [7] [6] [5] [7] Figure 11-622 13) Secure the top cover with two screws [7]. When doing so, check to make sure that the cable of the power supply unit is secured in place to the cable guide found inside the unit and, in addition, it is not trapped by the upper cover.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 4. Removing from the Copier When removing the copy data controller from the copier, start service mode, and execute COPIER>OPTION>IN-FACE>BCLR. 0: not connected. 1: connected. If the setting is not ‘0’, a communication error ‘E717’ (between copy data controller and copier) will occur. 11-46 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION VII. INSTALLING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II Note: The Remote Diagnostic Device II is not available in certain sales areas. 1. Installing to the Copier When installing the diagnostic device to the copier, keep the following in mind: 1. Be sure to comply with the laws and regulations of the country. 2. Be sure that the copier has been properly installed. 3. Be sure that the copier’s power plug is disconnected. 4.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 2) Connect the connector [3] of the power supply unit to the connector [4] of the diagnostic device as shown. [4] [3] Figure 11-702 3) Remove the four screws [6], and detach the face plate [5] of the copier’s rear cover. [5] [6] [6] Figure 11-703 11-48 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 4) Connect the 8-pin connector [7] of the diagnostic device and the 8-pin connector [8] of the copier side. [7] [8] 5) Secure the diagnostic device [9] to the copier’s rear cover with four screws [10]. (Use the screws that come with the unit.
7) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch (SW2-4) [12] on the PCB to ON (so that the mode of communication between the copier and the diagnostic device is IPC). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION [12] LED1 LED2 LED3 2 6 BAT1 1 1 1 SW3 SW2 LED5 LED6 LED4 SW4 2 IC6 CN4 SW1 CN3 CN2 8) If IC6 [13] is mounted on the PCB, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch [14] (SW2-7) to ON; if not, shift it to OFF. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 11-707 [14] Caution: 1.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION Switch SW3-1 SW3-2 Description Position See right. SW3-1 SW3-2 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON Function Sets the signal transmission level of the modem to -16 dBm. Sets the signal transmission level of the modem to -14 dBm. Sets the signal transmission level of the modem to -12 dBm. Sets the signal transmission level of the modem to -10 dBm. SW3-3 OFF Keep it to OFF at all times. SW3-4 ON OFF Use it to set the line to push pulse mode.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION [17] [19] LED1 LED2 LED3 2 6 BAT1 1 1 1 SW3 SW2 LED5 LED6 LED4 SW4 [18] IC6 2 CN4 SW1 CN3 CN2 Figure 11-711 12) When LED5 [19] (red) has turned on, see the DIP switch [17] (SW2) as shown, and press the push switch [18] (SW4). In response LED5 [19] should turn off, indicating that the RAM has been initialized. Bits of SW2 Setting SW2-1 OFF SW2-2 OFF SW2-3 OFF SW2-4 ON SW2-5 OFF SW2-6 ON SW2-7 See step 8).
13) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch [20] (SW2-6) on the PCB to OFF. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION [20] LED1 LED2 LED3 2 6 BAT1 1 1 1 SW3 SW2 LED5 LED6 LED4 SW4 2 IC6 CN4 SW1 CN3 CN2 Figure 11-713 14) Connect the telephone line to the diagnostic device. If you are connecting the diagnostic device on its own, connect the modular jack cable to the connector LINE [21].
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 16) Call the service station, and find out whether initial settings work has ended. If it ended in failure, start over by repeating steps 11) through 13), i.e., from initializing the RAM, and complete initial settings. Caution: Be sure to find out whetehr the settings of the diagnostic device are correct by referring to the settings kept at the service station. 17) Check to find out whether a call may be placed to the computer at the service station using the diagnostic device.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 19) Press the copier’s Copy Start key, and check to make sure LED3 [27] (pink) flashes each time delivery occurs. [27] LED1 LED2 LED3 2 6 BAT1 1 SW2 LED5 LED6 LED4 1 1 SW3 SW4 2 IC6 CN4 SW1 CN3 CN2 Figure 11-718 [2] 20) Attach the switch settings label [28] to the top cover, and record the settings of the switches. 21) Secure the top cover [1] in place with two screws [2].
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION VIII. INSTALLING THE CASSETTE HEATER 1) Open the shipping box of the cassette heater, and check to make sure that the following is available: [1]Cassette heater for 200-V model (FG2-9812-000) ...................... 1 pc. [2] Relay harness (FG6-2422-000) ...................... 1 pc. [3]Screw (XA9-0628-000) ........... 2 pc. [2] [1] [3] Figure 11-801 2) Turn off the copier’s power switch, and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 4) Remove the four screws, and detach the copier’s left lower cover. Screws 5) Open the cable guide, and put the 3-pin end of the relay harness inside. (If the guide is difficult to open, use a screwdriver.) Figure 11-803 Cable guide Relay harness Figure 11-804 6) Connect the 2-pin end of the relay harness to the copier’s connector.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 7) Lead the relay harness outside the rail of the cassette as shown, and connect its 3-pin end to the connector of the cassette heater. Route outside the rail. Relay harness Cassette heater Figure 11-806 8) Secure the relay harness in place with the guides. (Be sure to fix it in place at four locations and that its band position is to the right of the cable guides as shown.) Cable guides Relay harness Band Figure 11-807 11-58 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 9) Fit the cassette heater into the groove found at the rear of the cassette 1 stay. In the case of the CLC1130, · If you are installing the cassette heater for the upper cassette, fit it into the groove found at the rear of the cassette 1 stay. · If you are installing the cassette heater for the lower cassette, fit it into the groove found at the rear of the cassette 2 stay. Hook on the groove.
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION 11) Mount the inside cassette to each pickup cassette. Cassette heater switch Caution: Take care not to mistake the inside cassette for the universal cassette. 12) Turn on the cassette heater switch (SW8) found to the left bottom of the copier. 13) Mount the copier’s left bottom cover. ON OFF Figure 11-810 11-60 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING This chapter discusses how the copier’s parts may be inspected and serviced. I. II. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS 12-1 CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES .............................. 12-2 A. Copier.................................. 12-2 B. Side Paper Deck ................. 12-3 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. III. IV. SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART ..................................... SCHEDULED SERVICING LIST .......................................... A. Copier.......................
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS As of February 1999 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Part name Part number Ozone filter (FM2, 5, 6) Air filter (FM1) Air filter (FM3) Air filter (FM14, 15) Toner filter (FM5, 6) Ozone filter (FM5) COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. FB2-4397-000 FB4-4819-000 FF5-8405-000 FB2-0247-040 FB4-4442-000 FB4-9641-000 Q’ty 3 1 1 2 2 1 Life (copies) 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING II. CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES A. Copier No.
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING No.
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING B. Paper Deck As of February 1999 No. Part name Part number 1 2 3 Paper deck pickup roller Paper deck feeding roller Paper deck separation roller FB4-2033-000 FB4-2034-000 FB2-7777-020 12-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Q’ty Life (copies) Remarks 2 2 1 250,000 250,000 250,000 Actual number of copies. Actual number of copies. Actual number of copies. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING III. SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART Note: 1. As a rule, provide scheduled servicing every 20,000 copies. (For high humidity, 15,000.) 2. Before setting out for a visit, check the service book, and take replacement parts as needed. No. 1 2 3 Work Checks Report to the person in charge. Record the counter readings. Check the general conditions. Check faulty copies. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Check faulty copies. h. i.
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING No. Work 11 Put the sample copies in order. Clean up the area around the copier. 12 Record the final counter readings. 13 Fill out the service book, and report to the person in charge. 12-6 Checks Remarks Record the history of checks on the leakage breaker in the service book. COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING IV. SCHEDULED SERVICING LIST A. Copier Caution: Do not use solvents or oils other than those listed. Clean Unit Externals and controls Original exposure Pickup/ feeding Replace Lubricate Part Adjust Inspect As of February 1999 Intervals every every every every 20,000 25,000 40,000 50,000 Remarks Copyboard glass Copyboard cover Ozone filter Air filter Toner filter Use alcohol. Original reflecting cover No. 1 through No.
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Unit Intervals every every every every 20,000 25,000 40,000 50,000 Part Photosensitive drum area No. 2 cleaner blade Black toner concentration sensor Pre-cleaner sensor Remarks Turn over blade. See Note . Clean with cotton wad; see Note. Clean when replacing photosensitive drum. Clean when replacing photosensitive drum. Pre-exposure lamp filter Photosensitive drum butting (front) block Drum heater slip ring Dry wipe every 150.000 copeis.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I. II. III. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ........................... 13-3 A. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure ........................... 13-3 B. Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing ............................. 13-6 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS ....................... 13-7 A. Image Adjustment System .. 13-7 B. Exposure System .............. 13-14 C. Image Formation System .. 13-15 D. Pickup/Feeding System .... 13-20 E. Fixing System ................... 13-28 F.
G. PCBs ............................... 13-173 H. Paper Deck...................... 13-175 1. Sensors and Switches .................... 13-175 2. Motors, Clutches, Solenoids, and PCBs ......................... 13-176 I. Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB .. 13-177 1. DC Driver PCB .......... 13-177 2. CPU PCB .................. 13-178 3. IP main PCB ............ 13-178 4. Analog Processor PCB ........................... 13-179 5. Laser Driver PCB ...... 13-179 6.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Guide to the Troubleshooting Tables The troubleshooting procedure tables used in this document are compiled by tabulating commonly found troubleshooting flow charts.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Step Checks Yes/No 1 Is the power plug connected to the power outlet? NO Action Connect the plug. YES 2 Are the front cover ant the delivery cover closed fully? NO Close the cover. YES 3 Is the rated voltage present at the power outlet? NO Advise the user that the problem is not of the copier. YES · · When using a meter to check the voltage, you may come across a description reading: "measure the voltage between J109-1 (+) and -2 (-) on the DC controller PCB.
I. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION A. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
13-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
Adjusting Transfer Adjusting the Original Exposure System/Color Balance [C] [D] Check the locked condition of the transfer blade in service mode. Check the positions of the copyboard glass, standard white plate, original scanning lamp, reflecting plate, and mirrors, and clean them. Is a transfer fault noted? NO Check to see if the No. 1 mirror/No. 2 mirror base is not riding over the rail.
B. Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing 13-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING II. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Image Adjustment System 1 8 ± 1.5 mm Image Margin The image margin of a copy is normal if it is as follows when made in Direct with original detection OFF. Leading edge: 8/0 ± 1.5 mm (8.0 ± 2.0 mm) Left/right: 2.0 ± 1.5mm (2.0 ± 1.5 mm) Trailing edge: 2.5 ± 1.5 mm (4.5 ± 2.0 mm) The value in parentheses represents double-sided copying. 0 2 4 6 8 10 1214 16 18 20 Figure 13-201 Leading Edge Image Margin 2.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING a. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration 1) Make ten copies each from all cassettes, multifeeder, and duplexing unit, and check the left/right registration A; it is correct if as follows: for cassette: 2.0 ± 1.5 mm for multifeeder: 2.0 ± 1.5 mm for duplexing unit: 2.0 ± 1.5 mm 2) If the registration A is not as indicated, perform the following: A Figure 13-203 § For the Cassette 1) Remove the cassette from the cassette holder you want to adjust.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING § For the Multifeeder Turn the screw [1] to move the position of the tray so that the registration is 2.0 ± 1.5 mm in Direct. [1] Figure 13-205 § For the Duplexing Unit Loosen the screw [1], and move the position of the paper jogging guide so that the registration is 2.0 ± 1.5 mm in Direct. [1] Figure 13-206 b. Adjusting the Attraction Position (ATTRACT) 1) Select A4. 2) Select ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ATTCHK. 3) Set ATT-CHK to '1' (2-sheet retention; sides B and A), and press OK.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 5) Slide out the transfer frame. 6) Place a ruler and copy paper against the marking (Figure 13-207) etched to the transfer drum ring (front, rear), and measure the position d of the copy paper in relation to the leading edge of the copy paper. Perform this for both sides A and B. Markings (rear) (front) d Copy paper Linking plate 7) Make adjustments so that d is 0 ± 0.5 mm in service mode (ADJUST>FEED-ADJ).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING c. Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin (RG-XA, RG-XB) 1) Select ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>RGSTCHK in service mode, and press OK. 2) Set RGST-CHK to '1' (2-sheet retention; sides B and A), and press OK. 3) Select RGST-ON, and press OK. · A total of two prints (one each shown in the figure) will be generated. Test print on side A 4) Measure the leading edge margin d on the print. Perform this for both sides A and B.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING d. Adjusting the Transfer Delay (TRDELAY) 1) Select FUNCTION>ATTRACT>TR1CHK in service mode. 2) Set TR1-CHK to '1' (2-sheet retention; both sides B and A), and press OK. 3) Select TR1-ON, and press OK. · A total of two prints (one each shown in the figure) will be generated. Test print on side A Test print on side B 4) Measure the transfer delay d on side B on the generated print.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING e. Adjusting the Image Read Start Position (ADJ-XY) 1) Place the Test Sheet on the copyboard glass. 2) Select ADJUST>ADJ-XY in service mode. 3) on the ADJ-XY screen, press the Copy Start key. · The appropriate copying mode will automatically be selected, and a copy is made with a shift of about 50 mm as shown in the figure. 4) If part of the image is missing, decrease the setting of ADJ-X, ADJ-Y in service mode.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING B. Exposure System 1 Routing the Scanner Drive Cable Route the scanner drive cable as indicated; i.e., [1] through [8]. Then, perform "adjusting the mirror position." 1 2 3 5, 8 4 8 6 8 Figure 13-214 2 Adjusting the Mirror Position Be sure to adjust the position of the mirror when you have routed the scanner drive cable. 1) Extend the arm of the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3040-000) fully. 2) Fit the mirror positioning tool between No. 1 mirror base and No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING C. Image Formation System Adjusting the Height of Charging Wires The height (position) of the charging wire of each charging assembly may be adjusted by turning the screw found behind the assembly. A full turn of the screw will shift the charging wire by about 0.7 mm. You cannot, however, change the height of the wire of the internal static eliminator or the post-cleaning charging assembly. Charging assembly Primary charging assembly Height of charging wire (mm) 4 mm (approx.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 6) Dry wipe the window of the precleaning sensor, and mount it. 7) Turn on the power switch, and keep the copier in standby state. 8) Select FUNCTION>INSTALL> STIR-4 in service mode, and execute it. 9) Select FUNCTION>SENS-ADJ> CLN-OFST, and execute it. 10) Record the settings of ADJUST> SENS-ADJ>CLN-TH, CLN-TMP on the service label attached behind the front right cover. 11) Select FUNCTION>INSTALL> INIT-D in service mode, and execute it. c.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 5) Secure the drum shaft positioning tool [7] in place to the photosensitive drum frame unit with the two screws [8] removed in step 2). 6) Secure the drum motor assembly in place with seven screws. 7) Detach the drum shaft positioning tool, and slide out the photosensitive drum unit from the copier; then, mount the unit and parts removed in step 1). [8] [7] 3 Use of Grease Figure 13-220 Do NOT use grease (conducting or otherwise) to the slip ring for the drum heater.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 Replacing the Developer 1) Open the hopper unit fully. 2) An appreciable amount of developer will fall out in the next step. Keep a plastic bag [1] as shown. 3) Detach the cap [2] from the discharge opening found at the front bottom of the developing assembly whose developer you want to replace. 4) Select FUNCTION>INSTALL in service mode. 5) While keeping the plastic bag against the discharge opening, press RECV-M/C/Y/ K, as appropriate, in service mode.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 14) Fit the developer supply funnel that comes with the copier to the developing assembly upright. 15) Put the developer into the developing assembly. · Turn the developer container slowly while tilting it to facilitate the work. 16) When done, press the Stop key to stop the operation. 17) Execute STIR-Y/M/C/K in service mode (about 10 min). 18) Execute INIT-Y/M/C/K in service mode (about 10 min). 19) Select ADJUST>DENS in service mode.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING D. Pickup/Feeding System 1 [2] Orientation of the Cassette Pickup Roller [2] When mounting the pickup roller [1] to the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [2] on the rubber portion is at the copier's front. The pickup roller is identified by color as follows: · for the front, use the gold-colored roller. · for the rear, use the silver-colored roller.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller [A] If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup, adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller. a. If double feeding occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow A. b. If pickup failure occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow B.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 [2] Attaching the Timing Belt for the Multifeeder Assembly [1] [3] Keep the rack plate [1] of the multifeeder in closed state. Move the slide volume [2] in the direction of the arrow, and attach the timing belt [3] to the pulley. Figure 13-231 8 Adjusting the Position of the Duplexing Unit Paper Jogging Guide Sensor 1) Select A4R or LTRR, and perform copying on the first side of a double-sided copy. 2) Slide out the duplexing unit.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 Position of the Duplexing Feed Roller Solenoid While the steel core of the solenoid is drawn to the copier, mount the duplexing feed solenoid so that the distance L2 between the top edge of the feed roller and the holding tray is 49 ± 0.5 mm.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 5) Peel off the trailing edge of the transfer drum sheet and keep it off the transfer drum. Figure 13-236 6) Peel off the leading edge of the transfer drum sheet. Figure 13-237 7) Peel off the transfer drum sheet while holding it on its leading edge. Caution: Remove all traces of adhesive from the transfer drum ring. Figure 13-238 13-24 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING b. Attaching the Transfer Drum Sheet [1] Caution: Do not touch the area of the transfer drum sheet where copy paper will come into contact. 1) Clean the area of the transfer drum ring for adhesive tape. 2) Turn the ring so that the ring connecting plate [1] is as shown. 3) Peel off the adhesive tape from the leading edge (side with holes) of the transfer drum sheet. 4) Match the holes along the leading edge of the transfer drum sheet with the holes in the ring connecting plate.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 7) While keeping the leading edge of the transfer drum sheet against the transfer drum and stroking it as if to push the trailing edge over the leading edge, attach the transfer drum sheet from center to both sides. Figure 13-243 Caution: Be sure that there is no warping or slacking at the center of the transfer drum sheet.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 When Replacing the Transfer Drum Assembly If you have replaced the transfer drum, perform the following in service mode (ADJUST>FEED-ADJ; p. 13-7): 1. Adjusting the attraction position (ATT-TA, ATT-T-B) 2. Adjusting the image leading edge margin (RG-XA, RG-XB, RG-Y) 3.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING E. Fixing System When Replacing the Fixing Heater 1 Do not touch the surface of the heater. Reference: You need not orient the copier's fixing heater (front, rear) in a specific orientation. b Adjusting the Nip (nut for locking the fixing assembly) a. Measuring the Nip Width If you are taking measurements while the roller is not hot, let the copier complete its standby period, wait 15 min, and make 20 copies. b. Taking Measurements 1) Start service mode.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Orientation of the Cleaning Belt Mount the fixing cleaning belt as shown . Figure 13-249 Fixing Upper Cleaning Belt (rear view) 4 Orientation of the fixing Upper/ Lower Solenoid [A] Figure 13-250 Fixing Lower Cleaning Belt (rear view) Solenoid Adjust the position so that the stroke [A] is 5 ± 0.2 mm for the fixing paper solenoid and 4 ± 0.2 mm for the lower fixing solenoid. Figure 13-251 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 [1] Points to Note When Replacing the Oil Coating Assembly Caution: 1. The oil coating unit is adjusted and assembled at the factory, and must not be removed. Do not touch the screws [1] shown in the figure. 2. If you have replaced the oil felt, be sure to execute COPIER>OPTION> FIXING>PUMP-ON in service mode to impregnate it with fixing oil. Be sure to press the Stop key in about 10 min.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING F. Externals/Controls 1 Handling the Flywheel [1] The copier's flywheel [1] weighs 8 kg in total. Take extra care not to drop it during work. When holding it, be sure to support it on its left and right as shown. Figure 13-254 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING G. Paper Deck 1 Deck front cover Mounting the Paper Level Indicator If you have moved the paper level indicator drive belt behind the front cover or the deck lifter when removing the front cover, perform the following to correct its position: 1) Move down the deck lifter to the lower limit. 2) Move the drive belt [1] behind the front cover by hand lightly in the direction of the arrow until it stops (so that the white area in the window [2] increases).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Adjusting the Position of the Roll Make adjustments using the four mounting screws [4] of the roll support plate [3] so that the roll [1] is about 3 mm from the floor [2] when the compartment is fully slid out. (At this time, use the graduation [5] on the front side plate as a reference.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 [3] Orientation of the Deck Pickup Roller [2] When mounting the deck pickup roller [1] at the front, be sure that the marking [2] on the collar (silver-colored) is at the copier's front and the marking [3] on the side of the roller is at the copier's rear.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 Adjusting the Deck Separation Roller Pressure If double feeding or pickup failure occurs when pickup is from the side paper deck, adjust the position of pressure spring of the deck separation roller. · If pickup failure occurs, move the position of the spring in the direction of arrow A. · If double feeding occurs, move the position of the spring in the direction of arrow B. A B Figure 13-263 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING H. Electrical System The copier's service mode is used to adjust its electrical mechanisms. Most of them are adjusted at the factory, and require high precision. As a rule, do not make those adjustments that are not discussed herein. 1 When Replacing the CPU PCB 1) Check the data of ADJUST and OPTION in service mode before replacement, and take notes. Or, back up the data using the downloading tool. 2) Remove the CPU PCB. 3) Mount the new CPU PCB.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Adjusting the Laser Power If you replaced the laser scanner unit, laser driver PCB, or laser controller PCB, enter the values attached to the PCB in service mode (ADJUST>LASER). Attach the label behind the right front cover for future reference. If the output of the laser decreases, be sure to adjust the laser power. · Laser power checker (FY9-4013) · Digital multimeter (CK-0436) Caution: Check the values recorded on the label attached to the right front door.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Caution: 1. Turn VR2 slowly while monitoring the output of the laser power checker so as to avoid increasing the laser power excessively. Turning VR2 counterclockwise will decrease the laser output. 2. Be sure not to exceed the value recorded on the label. Otherwise, the laser diode may become damaged. 3. Do NOT press the Copy Start key while making adjustments using VR2. 13) Press the Stop key to stop the laser output. 14) Adjust the laser.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 8) Detach the laser power checker, and secure the slot cover in place. 9) Mount the left inside cover. 5 When Replacing the Scanning Lamp, Standard White Plate, Lamp Regulator, Lamp Reflecting Plate, Analog Processor PCB, No. 1 Mirror Base Unit, No. 1 Mirror, No. 2 Mirror Base Unit, No. 2 Mirror, No. 3 Mirror, and CCD Unit 1) Close the front cover, and wait until the copier enters standby state. (Do not open the front cover while CCD-ADJ is being executed.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 9) 10) 11) 12) Press the Reset key, and turn off the power switch. Disconnect the connector J1 of the environment measurement PCB. Turn on the power switch. Check the temperature and the humidity on the DISPLAY>ANALOG screen in service mode. TEMP: 25 ±5°C ABS-HUM: 36 ±10% 13) Check to see that the reading is as indicated. If not, suspect a fault on the DC driver PCB or the CPU PCB. 14) Press the Reset key. 15) Turn off the power switch.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 Registering the Cassette/Multifeeder Paper Width Basic Value Perform what follows below for the following: · If you have replaced the copier's paper width detecting VR (including the multifeeder). · If you have adjusted the front/rear registration of the cassette. You need to register a paper width basic value of STMTR and A4R for each cassette; for the multifeeder, you must register A6R, A4R, and A4. a.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 9 Checking the Surface Potential System If an image fault has occurred, you must be sure if the cause is in the static latent image formation block (including the photosensitive drum and the potential control system) or the developing/transfer system. To that end, the surface potential must be checked as follows: a. Checking the Surface Potential 1) Select FUNCTION>DPC>DPC in service mode (for potential control). 2) Check the following using DISPLAY>DPOT in service mode.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Method 2 1) Turn off the power switch. 2) Remove the photosensitive drum unit. 3) Fit the potential sensor electrode (TKN-0197) to the potential sensor. Caution: When fitting the potential sensor electrode to the potential sensor, make sure that magenta of the electrode will not come into contact with the potential sensor base. 4) Attach the clip of the jumper line to the potential sensor electrode. Caution: Be sure NOT to let the clip come into contact with the sensor cover.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 When Replacing the CCD Driver PCB Check the setting of the DIP switch on the old DC driver PCB, and set the DIP switch on the new DC driver PCB. 11 Checking the Photointerrupter The copier allows the use of its service mode when checking its photointerrupers in addition to the use of a conventional meter. 1. Using a Meter 1) Set the meter range to 30 VDC. 2) Connect the - probe of the meter to J101-7 (GND) on the DC driver PCB or J3-3 (GND) on the deck driver PCB.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Sensor PS1 Original scanner HP sensor PS2 Side A sensor PS3 Side B sensor PS4 C sensor Connector No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Sensor PS11 Fixing upper cleaning belt length sensor PS12 Internal delivery sensor PS15 Multi feeder paper sensor PS17 Multifeeder lifter H sensor PS18 Multifeeder lifter L sensor PS19 (CLC1120/ 1130) Cassette 1 lifter sensor PS20 (CLC1120/ 1130) Cassette 1 paper sensor PS21 (CLC1120/ 1130) Pickup vertical path 1 sensor PS22/DPS22 Cassette 2/1 lifter sensor PS23/DPS23 Cassette 3/2 lifter sensor PS24/DPS24 Cassette 2/1 paper sensor 13-46 Connector No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Sensor PS25/DPS25 Cassette 3/2 paper sensor PS26 Pickup vertical path 2/1 sensor PS27 Pickup vertical path 3/2 sensor PS28 (CLC1150) Re-pickup vertical path sensor PS30 Preregistration sensor PS31 External delivery sensor PS32 (CLC1150) Delivery vertical path 1 sensor PS33 (CLC1150) Delivery vertical path 2 sensor PS34 (CLC1150) Duplexing path paper sensor PS35 (CLC1150) Duplexing reversal paper sensor PS36 (CLC1150) Duplexing tray paper sensor Connector No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Sensor PS37 (CLC1150) Duplexing inlet paper sensor PS40 (CLC1150) Paper jogging guide HP sensor PS41 Right front cover sensor Connector No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Sensor PS53 Y developing assembly HP sensor PS55 Bk developing assembly HP sensor PS57 Transfer drum HP sensor PS59 Transfer drum cleaner HP sensor PS62 Multifeeder tray open/ closed sensor PS67 Fixing lower cleaning belt length sensor PS68 Waste toner case full sensor PS69 Transparency sensor Take measurements during copying. When at HP, When not at HP, I/O display 1 0 J1015-B3 P00A-11 Take measurements during copying operation.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Sensor PS103 Deck lifter upper limit sensor Connector No. I/O address J5-A7 P007-13 PS104 Deck lifter position sensor 18 J5-A10 --------- PS105 Deck set sensor J6-4 P016-14 PS107 Deck paper level upper sensor J4-5 P016-12 PS108 Deck paper level lower sensor J4-2 P016-11 PS109 Deck open sensor J6-7 P016-15 13-50 Checks Put the light-blocking plate while in standby. Push the lightblocking plate while in standby. Push the lightblocking plate while in standby.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING III. TROUBLESHOOTING FAULTY IMAGES A. Making Initial Checks 1. Environment of the Site Check the site to see if it satisfies the following: a. The voltage of the power supply is as rated (± 10%). b. It is not in a high temperature or high humidity environment (especially near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier), and it is not too cold. It is not near a source of fire, and it is not subject to dust. c. It is not subject to ammonium gas. d.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 6. Checking the Paper a. Check to see if the paper is of a type recommended by Canon. b. Check to see if the paper is dry. Try copying on paper from a fresh pack. 7. Checking Periodically Replaced Parts a. Replace any parts that have reached the end of service life. 8. Others When a machine is brought in from a cold to warm place, condensation can occur inside it, causing various problems. a.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING B. Standard Images A "standard image" is an image that is as described below for the gray scale, color patch, and 3color gradation scale of a copy made of the CA-1 Test Sheet in 4-full color: 1. Gray Scale No. 1 (dark area) is more or less black, and the density decreases according to number, with No. 8 (light area) barely visible and No. 9 white. 2. Color Patch Each color can be identified, and is not appreciably different from the color on the original (Test Sheet). 3.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Canon CA-1 Test Chart Gray scale from No.1 to No.3: dark area from No.4 to No.6: halftone area from No.7 to No.9: light area Color · path halftone band Photo Gradation scale from No.1 to No.3: dark area from No.4 to No.6: halftone area from No.7 to No.9: light area Figure 13-301 13-54 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Figure 13-302 Standard Image Sample COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING C. Test Print The copier possesses seven types of test prints, each one enabling identification of a specific type of image fault. If a fault on normally made copies does not occur on its respective test print, you may suspect the original exposure system, CCD, and analog or image processor. 1. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Selecting a Test Print Pattern Set the copy count and copy paper size. Select COPIER>TEST>PG in service mode. Enter '1' to TXPH, and enter '0' to THRU.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 2. Horizontal Stripe Test Print (PG>TYPE=10, 16) Use a horizontal test print to check the density of a dark area of each color, balance among colors, and white lines in reference to development. a. Density of a Dark Area of Each Color and Balance of Colors The density must not be appreciably low (light). If the density is too low (light) for a single color, suspect a fault in the developing assembly of that color.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 3. 256-Color Test Print (PG>TYPE=2) Us a 256-color test print to check hues. A 256-color test print shows 256 colors using 16 x 16 frames starting at the leading edge of copy paper. (The rows that follow are repetitions of the frames.) a. Hues of 256 Colors The hues are as shown in the figure. Otherwise, suspect deterioration of the developer, deterioration of the photosensitive drum, and mixing of developers.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 4. 256-Gradation Test Print (PG>TYPE=3) Use a 256-gradation test print to check gradation and balance among colors. a. Gradation Use the test print to check gradation between density 0 and density 255. 16 frames Caution: You can generate a printout of each developer color using COPIER>TEST>PG of service mode and selecting the following: COLOR-Y, COLOR-M, COLOR-C, COLOR-K. 16 frames Figure 13-305 COLOR-M Set to '1' COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 5. 16-Gradation Test Print (PG>TYPE=4) Use a 16-gradation test print to check gradation, fogging, white lines, uneven density between left and right, and balance of colors. a. Gradation If density graduation in 16 gradations is not noted as shown, suspect a fault in the laser system. b. Fogging If fogging is noted in the white area of the figure, suspect a fault in the developing system or the photosensitive drum or wrong adjustment of the laser. c.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 6. Halftone Test Print (PG>TYPE=5) Use a halftone test print to check transfer faults, black lines, white lines, or uneven density at regular intervals. a. Transfer Fault If a transfer fault is noted, suspect a fault on the transfer drum sheet, transfer blade, and static eliminator. b. Black Lines If black lines are noted, suspect scratches on the photosensitive drum and dirt on the primary charging wire/grid plate. c.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Figure 13-307 COLOR-M Set to '1' 13-62 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 7. Grid Test Print (PG>TYPE=6) Use a grid test print to check color displacement, angles, straight lines. a. Color Displacement If color displacement is noted, suspect a fault on the transfer drum sheet. Even if you notice color displacement on a test print, you may not find it on a regular copy because of black text processing. The copier is normal if regular copies do not show color displacement.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 8. YMCBk 64-Gradation Test Print (PG>TYPE=12) Use a YMCBk 64-gradation test print to check the gradation of each color (Y, M, C, Bk) at the same time. Figure 13-309 13-64 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 9. BGR 64-Gradation Test Print (PG>TYPE=13) Use a BGR 64-gradation test print to check the gray balance and gradation in BGR mode (2color mode). Figure 13-310 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 10. Full-Color 16-Gradation (YMCBk) Test Pint (PG>TYPE=14) Use a full-color 16-gradation (YMCBk) test print to check gray balance, gradation of each color (Y, M, C, Bk) and fogging. a. Gray Balance Look at the gray scale area to find out whether each color is generated in even density. b. Gradation Check the gradation of each color (Y, M, C, Bk) and for difference in density. c.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 11. Full-Color Light Area/16-Gradation (YMCBk) Test Print (PG>TYPE=15) Use a full-color light area/16-gradation test print to check the gray balance of a light area and the gradation of each color (Y, M, C, Bk). Compared with one generated using P>TYPE=14, this test print makes a check easier. Light area Figure 13-312 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING D. Troubleshooting Image Problems No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 Fault The copy is too light. The copy has uneven density (vertical). The copy has uneven density (horizontal). The copy is foggy. The copy has vertical lines. The copy has white lines (vertical). The copy has white spots (horizontal). The copy has white spots. The copy has white spots (in circles). The copy has a soiled image/back. The copy has a fixing fault.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 The copy has uneven density (vertical). Cause ------------ Step 1 ------------ 2 Moire 3 Scanner 4 5 6 Service mode 7 8 Yes/No YES End. NO Go to step 12. YES Clean the standard white plate, scanning lamp, and reflecting plate.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Transfer/static eliminating system Step 13 Checks Is the transfer blade or the transfer blade protective sheet warped or faulty? Yes/No YES Fixing unit 14 Are there scratches or dents in the peripheral direction of the fixing roller (upper, lower)? YES NO 13-70 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Action Correct the warping of the transfer blade. Or, replace the transfer charging assembly. Replace the fixing roller.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 The copy has uneven density (horizontal). Checks Clean the primary charging assembly, dust-proofing glass, reflecting mirror, lamp, and lens. Is the problem corrected? Is the uneven density noted in a specific color of the output image of the halftone test print (TYPE=5)? Is the uneven density caused by moire patterns? · A "moire" pattern refers to lines of interference occurring when making a copy of an original consisting of dots. Yes/No YES End. NO Go to step 7.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 The copy has vertical lines. Cause ------------ Step 1 ------------ 2 Primary charging wire cleaner 3 Cleaning 4 Action Checks Clean the primary charging assembly, dust-proofing glass, reflecting mirror, and lens.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Photosensitive drum Step 10 Checks Are there scratches in the peripheral direction of the photosensitive surface? Yes/No NO Fixing assembly 11 Are there scratches in the peripheral direction of the fixing upper roller? YES 12 Are there scratches and dents in the axial direction of the fixing roller (upper, lower)? Is there a fault in the fixing oil applying assembly, oil hose, oil filter, oil pump, and oil removing blade? YES Clean the standard white plate, scann
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 The copy has white lines. Cause ------------ Step 1 Checks Clean the charging assembly, dustproofing glass, reflecting mirror, and lens. Is the problem corrected? Yes/No YES End. ------------ 2 NO Go to step 17. ------------ 3 YES Go to step 9. Fixing assembly 4 Generate a halftone test print (TYPE=5). Is the problem noted? Generate a horizontal stripe test print (TYPE=10).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Photosensitive drum Step 15 Checks Are there scratches in the peripheral direction of the photosensitive drum? Yes/No NO Copy paper 16 YES Optical path CCD, standard white plate (dirt, scratches) 17 When copy paper wraps around the transfer drum, is it in contact with the transfer cleaning brush, polishing roller, or the like? Clean the standard white plate, scanning lamp, reflecting plate, and mirror.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 The copy has lines/is foggy (horizontal). Cause ------------ Step 1 ------------ 2 Photosensitive drum 3 Checks Clean the primary charging assembly, dust-proofing glass, reflecting mirror, and lens. Is the problem corrected? Generate a halftone test print (TYPE=5). Is the problem noted? Is the problem noted at the same position on A3 copies made in continuous mode but noted at different positions if copies are made at intervals? Yes/No YES End. NO Go to step 4.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING · Details of Horizontal Lines No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING No. Color/location (A3) 4 M: · 185 mm from the leading edge and thereafter to the end C: · 135 mm from the leading edge 5 All colors, 260 mm from the leading edge to 315 mm 7 All colors, 199 mm from the leading edge 8 Non-specific color, nonspecific position 13-78 Interval Cause (mm) 38 The attraction roller has a fault: · The engagement of the attraction roller drive gear 2.7 is not proper. · The attraction roller has wear, deformation, scratches, cracks, vibration.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 The copy has white spots (horizontal). Cause Mirror base rail, original exposure system cable Step 1 Checks Generate a halftone test print (TYPE=5).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 9 The copy has white spots. Checks Is there a lump of toner in the middle of a spot? Is the problem noted in all colors? Yes/No YES Action Go to step 5. NO Is the problem noted at the same position on all copies made in continuous mode, but at different positions on copies made at intervals? Is the fault noted at the same position? YES Check the developing assembly and the developing cylinder for which the problem is noted; if a fault is found, replace it.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 The copy has a white spot (middle of trailing edge). A white spot in the middle of the trailing edge of a copy usually takes the following form: White spot Copy paper · Principles behind the Fault This type of fault mostly occurs when copy paper is wavy. If its leading edge is not attracted evenly, its trailing edge will lose contact with the drum in an increased degree.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause ADJUST>HVATT>HV-ATT in service mode (attraction highvoltage output adjustment mode) 13-82 Step 7 Checks Decrease the setting of ATT-xx according to the type of paper suffering from the problem.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 The copy has a soiled image/back. Cause ------------ Step 1 Image margin 2 Primary charging assembly, developing bias, laser power Cleaning Checks Is the image soiled only after a double-sided copy has been made? Is the image margin within specification? Yes/No YES Action Go to step 11.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Developing assembly, cleaner assembly, transfer drum cleaner assembly Step 12 Checks Is the transfer drum sheet soiled with toner or fixing oil? Yes/No YES 1. 2. Fixing assembly 13 Is the take-up mechanism of the cleaning belt for the fixing assembly normal? Is the cleaning performance of the upper/lower roller normal? NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. YES Delivery assembly, external static eliminator/ separation charging assembly 13-84 1. 2. COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 12 The copy has a fixing fault.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 The copy has stray toner (from fixing). In this fault, stray toner is found immediately after a high-density area of an image (in relation to feeding direction) and in the form of black dots. High-density area (feeding direction) Stray toner area Cause ADJUST>HV-SP (service mode) 13-86 Step 1 Checks Decrease the setting of SPxx for the mode and the type of paper in question using ADJUST>HV-SP in service mode.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause ADJUST>HVSP>HV-SP Step 2 Toner (excess amount) 3 14 Checks Increase the setting of SP-OFST in ADJUST>HV-SP>SP-OFST in service mode. Is the problem corrected? Check the latent image formation system and the developing system. Is there a fault? Yes/No YES Action End. Settings: -6 to 0 Unit: 50 µA YES NO Correct the fault. Decrease the copy density using the Copy Density key.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 15 The copy is solid black. Checks Generate a horizontal stripe test print (TYPE=10). Is the image normal? Execute FUNCTION>DPC>DPC in service mode. Is the copy image normal? Is the photosensitive drum cleaned? Yes/No YES Action Go to step 5. YES End.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 The copy has color displacement. Cause Side A sensor, side B sensor Step 1 Drum gear 2 Transfer drum (gap) 3 Flywheel (gap) 4 Drum (dirt on end) 5 Transfer drum sheet Push-on brush 6 Attraction 8 7 Checks Clean the side A sensor and the side B sensor (PS2, PS3) of the transfer drum.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING No. 1 Color/location (A3) All colors; 0 to 20 mm from leading edge Cause The black text recognition mechanism has failed because of vibration of the No. 1/No. 2 mirror mount. 2 M: near 105 or 160 mm from the leading edge C: near 50 or 105 mm from the leading edge Y: near 50 mm from the lading edge K: near 150 mm from the leading edge All colors; 390 mm to 410 mm from the leading edge The impact occurring when the developing assembly is locked in position rocks the No. 1/No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 17 The copy has uneven density (A3, center). Cause ------------ Step 1 Photosensitive drum shaft 2 3 4 Transfer drum assembly 5 6 7 8 Attraction pushon roller unit 9 10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Checks Generate a halftone test print using TYPE=5 (DENS-M/C/Y/K=25, TXPH=0), and make checks.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 The copy has lines (1st copy only; near 175 mm from the leading edge; A3). Cause ------------ Step 1 Transfer drum assembly Attraction roll Photosensitive drum shaft Flywheel 19 2 Checks Generate a halftone test print using TYPE=5 (DENS-M/C/Y/K=25, TXPH=0). Is the end of the roller spacer bent? YES Replace the spacer.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 20 The copy has uneven density (magenta). Cause ------------ Step 1 Transfer frame 2 3 Registration roller clutch (CL9) 4 Photosensitive drum shaft Flywheel 5 Checks Generate a halftone test print using TYPE=5 (DENS-M/C/Y/K=25, TXPH=0).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 22 The copy has color displacement (entire area; random). Cause ------------ Step 1 Photosensitive drum shaft Flywheel 2 3 4 Checks Generate a grid test print (TYPE=6), and make a check. Is the screw on the core fixing roll of the photosensitive drum loose? Is the fixing screw of the flywheel loose? Is the flywheel mounted at an angle? Photosensitive drum drive assembly 23 Action YES Tighten the screw. YES Tighten the fixing screw. YES Mount the flywheel properly.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 24 The copy is uneven (random) Cause ------------ Step 1 Photosensitive drum shaft 2 3 4 Flywheel 5 6 Photosensitive drum frame unit 7 8 Photosensitive drum assembly 9 Photosensitive drum drive assembly 10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Checks Generate a halftone print using TYPE=5 (DENS-M/C/Y/K=25, TXPH=0). Is the screw on the core fixing roll of the photosensitive drum loose? Slide the photosensitive drum frame unit about 50 mm out of the copier.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 25 The copy has uneven density (at regular intervals; other than 23 or 24). Cause ------------ Step 1 Photosensitive drum shaft Flywheel 2 Photosensitive drum drive assembly 4 13-96 3 Checks Generate a halftone test print using TYPE=5 (DNES-M/C/Y/K=25, TXPH=0), and make a check. Is the screw on the core fixing roll of the photosensitive drum loose? Is the fixing screw on the flywheel loose? Is the flywheel mounted at an angle? Yes/No YES Tighten the screw.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions 1 · E000/E004 See the detail code of E000 in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR). a. E000=0101, 0201, 0102, 0202, 0103, 0203, 0104, 0204, E004=0101, 0201 Cause ------------ Step 1 Fixing thermistor (THM1 through THM4; short circuit) 2 Checks Clear E000/E004 (Note).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING b. E000=0103, 0203, 0105, 0205, 0120, 0221, 0131, 0231, 0140, 0240, 0150, 0250 Cause ------------ Step 1 Fixing thermistor (HTM1 through THM4; short circuit) 2 Fixing thermistor (THM1 through THM4; mounting) Fixing thermistors (THM1 through THM4; soiling) 3 Operating environment 5 SSR1 DC driver PCB, CPU PCB 6 13-98 4 Checks Clear E000, and turn on the power switch. Does the fixing heater turn on when the power switch is turned on? · Make a visual check.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 E005 Cause Fixing cleaning belt (upper, lower) Fixing cleaning belt counter Step 1 Checks Is the cleaning belt almost used up? Yes/No YES 2 NO Sensor lever (position) 3 Fixing cleaning belt length sensor (upper, PS11; lower, PS67) DC driver PCB, CPU PCB 4 After replacing the fixing cleaning belt, has the cleaning belt counter been cleared in service mode (COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIXWEB)? Is the lever of the fixing cleaning belt length sensor as follows? for the fixing u
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 E010 Cause ------------ Step 1 Overload 2 Main motor (M4) 3 DC fuse PCB 4 DC driver PCB, CPU PCB 5 Main motor (M4) 13-100 Checks Does the main motor rotate during initial rotation? Does the main motor start to but fail to rotate during initial rotation? Yes/No YES Action Go to step 5. YES Set the meter range to 5 VDC, and measure the voltage between J1026-A3 (+; MNMON) and J1026-A4 (-; GND) on the DC driver PCB.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 E012 Cause ------------ Step 1 Overload 2 Drum motor (M2) 3 DC fuse PCB 4 DC driver PCB, CPU PCB 5 Drum motor (M2) COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Checks Does the drum motor rotate during initial rotation? Does the drum motor start to but fail to rotate during initial rotation? Yes/No YES Action Go to step 5. YES Set the meter range to 5 VDC, and measure the voltage between J1026-A12 (+; DRMON) and J1026-A13 (-; GND) on the DC driver PCB.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 E013 Cause Waste toner feedscrew Step 1 Checks Is the waste toner feedscrew drive gear pushing the waste toner feedscrew lock detecting switch (SW7)? Yes/No YES Waste toner feedscrew lock detecting switch (SW7) DC driver PCB, CPU PCB 2 Is the voltage between J1012-A2 (+) and J1012-A1 (-) on the DC driver PCB about 5 V when the switch is pressed and about 0 V when the switch is released? NO YES Replace the DC driver PCB or the CPU PCB.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 E016 Cause Cleaner blade reciprocating motor (M7) Step 1 DC driver PCB, CPU PCB 9 Action Check the wiring from J1028 to the motor; if normal, replace the motor. Replace the DC driver PCB or the CPU PCB. Checks Set the meter range to 30 VDC, and measure the voltage between J1028-3 (+; CBRCMA) and J10281 (-; CBRCMB) on the DC driver PCB.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 · E020 Check the detail code of E000 in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR). a. E020=xx00, xx10, xx11, xx12, xx13, xx14, xx15, xx16, xx17, xx20, xx21, xx22, xx23, xx24, xx30, xx31, xx33, xx34, xx40, xx41 (The first two digits indicate color; e.g., xx=01 is Y, 02 is M, 03 is C, 04 is Bk).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause ------------ Step 5 Toner concentration sensor 6 DC driver PCB, CPU PCB Stray light COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Yes/No YES Action Go to step 7. YES End. · When you have replaced the toner concentration sensor, be sure to replace the developer also. Replace the DC driver PCB or the CPU PCB. Mount the transfer unit front cover. Replace the black toner concentration sensor. · If you have replaced the toner concentration sensor, be sure to replace the developer also.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING b. E020=xx80, xx81 (The first two digits indicate color; e.g., xx=00 for all colors, 01 for M, 02 for C, 03 for Y, and 04 for Bk.) Cause Photosensitive drum Laser exposure system Step 1 Checks Is the photosensitive drum soiled? Yes/No YES 2 Is the laser power normal? NO ------------ 3 NO Black toner concentration sensor 4 Is E020 indicated for Bk? (Is it E020=04xx?) Is the window of the black toner concentration sensor soiled? Action Replace the cleaning blade.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING c. E020=xx50, xx51, xx60, xx61, xx62, xx63, xx64, xx65, xx66, xx70, x71, xx72, xx73, xx74, xx75, xx76 (The first two digits indicate color; e.g., xx=00 for all colors, 01 for M, 02 for C, 03 for Y, and 04 for Bk.) Cause Backup data Step 1 CPU PCB 2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Checks Is the setting of COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS in service mode identical to the setting recorded on the service label? Replace the CPU PCB.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING d. E020=xx90, xx91, xx92, xx93, xxA0, xxA1, xxA2, xxB0, xxB1, xxB2, xxC0, xxD0, xxE0 Cause ------------ Step 1 Toner (uneven concentration inside developing assembly) 2 Developer 3 ------------ 4 Stray light 5 Black toner concentration sensor Toner concentration sensor 6 Photosensitive drum Developing cylinder 7 Developing assembly locking assembly Toner level sensor 9 13-108 8 Checks Perform the instructions under "E20 Making a Check" on the next page.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING e. E020=00FF, xxFF Cause Hopper motor (M10) DC driver PCB, CPU PCB Step 1 Checks Select the hopper motor (0) in service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>PARTCHK>MTR), and press OK for MTR-ON. Does the hopper motor rotate? Yes/No NO YES Action Check the wiring from the DC driver PCB to the hopper motor; if normal, replace the motor. Replace the DC driver PCB or the CPU PCB. E020 Making Checks 1) Find out the color for which E020 is indicated in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 · E021 Check the detail code in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR). Checks Is the detail code 0100, 0200, 0300, or 0400? Is the connector of the developing assembly HP sensor indicated by the detail code connected securely? Replace the developing assembly HP sensor indicated by the detail code. Is the problem corrected? Yes/No YES Action Go to step 4. YES Connect the connector securely. YES End.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 12 · E040 Check the detail code in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR). Checks Is the detail code 0001, 0002, or 0003? Is the cassette lifter motor drive assembly indicated by the detail code subjected to foreign matter or damage? Replace the cassette lifter motor indicated by the detail code. Is the problem corrected? Yes/No YES Action Go to step 4. YES Remove the foreign matter. If damage is found, remove the cause, and make repairs. End.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 E051 Cause Paper jogging guide HP sensor (PS40) Step 1 Paper jogging guide 2 Duplexing paper jogging guide motor (PM14) DC fuse PCB 3 Duplexing driver PCB DC driver PCB, CPU PCB 5 13-112 4 Checks Is the paper jogging guide HP sensor normal? (See the instructions on how to check photointerrupers.) Is there any obstacle or foreign matter in the path of the paper jogging guide plate? Replace the duplexing paper jogging guide motor.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 15 E061 Cause ------------ Step 1 ------------ 2 Potential sensor unit Pre-exposure lamp 3 4 Checks Is the setting of COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT-M/ C/Y/K in service mode identical to the settings recorded on the service label? Check the detail code in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause HVT-DC PCB Step 9 Primary charging grid plate 10 High-voltage cable 11 HVT-DC PCB Post-cleaning charging assembly 12 13 14 High-voltage cable Laser exposure system 15 16 17 18 Checks Is the primary charging assembly fitted properly? Is the grid plate of the primary charging assembly mounted properly? Is there electrical continuity from the grid plate of the primary charging assembly to the highvoltage transformer (HVT-DC)? Yes/No NO NO Check the grid highvol
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Photosensitive drum Potential sensor Step 20 Photosensitive drum CPU PCB 22 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. 21 Checks Is the photosensitive drum grounded properly? Clean the potential sensor. Is the problem corrected? Replace the photosensitive drum. Is the problem corrected? YES Action Ground the drum properly. End. YES End. NO Replace the CPU PCB. Yes/No NO CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 E062 Cause Step 1 Checks Replace SSR2.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 · E071 Check the detail code in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR). Cause Side A sensor, side B sensor, C sensor (PS2, PS3, PS4) Signal plate Step 1 Checks Replace the sensor indicated by the detail code.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 19 · E072 Check the detail code in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR). a. E72=0002 Cause Transfer drum cleaner brush motor (M8) Registration path driver PCB Step 1 2 DC driver PCB, CPU PCB Checks Replace the transfer drum cleaner brush motor. Is the problem corrected? Set the meter range to 12 VDC, and press the Copy Start key.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 20 · E073 Check the detail code in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR). a. E073=0001 Cause Drawer connector 1 (transfer unit lever) DC driver PCB, CPU PCB Step 1 Checks Does the drawer connector 1 of the transfer unit lever have a fault? Yes/No YES Action Replace the drawer connector 1. NO Check the wiring from J1014-A4 on the DC driver PCB to the drawer connector J571 of the transfer unit lever; if normal, replace the DC driver PCB or the CPU PCB.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 21 E074 Cause Transfer drum HP sensor (PS57) Step 1 Transfer drum locking motor (PM5) DC fuse PCB 2 Transfer locking driver PCB DC driver PCB, CPU PCB 4 22 3 Checks Is the transfer drum HP sensor normal? (See the instructions on how to check photointerrupers.) Replace the transfer drum locking motor. Is the problem corrected? Yes/No NO Action Replace the sensor (PS57). YES End.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 23 E100 Cause Laser shutter Step 1 DC power supply PCB 2 Checks Is the laser shutter operation normal? Is power present at J1200 on the laser controller PCB? Yes/No NO Action Replace any faulty part NO Check the wiring and the DC fuse PCB; if normal, replace the DC power supply PCB.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 24 E110 Cause DC fuse PCB Step 1 Laser scanner motor (M3) DC driver PCB, CPU PCB 2 25 Yes/No NO YES NO Action Replace the DC fuse PCB. End. Check the wiring from the motor to the DC driver PCB; if normal, replace the DC driver PCB or the CPU PCB. E120 Cause Laser controller unit DC driver PCB CPU PCB 26 Checks Is 24 V present between J375-1 and -2 on the laser scanner driver PCB? Replace the laser scanner motor.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 27 E202 Note: No code id indicated, and keys are disabled. Cause Original scanner HP sensor (PS1) Step 1 Original scanner motor (PM15) Original scanner motor driver PCB CPU PCB 2 28 3 Checks Is the original scanner HP sensor normal? (See the instructions on how to check photointerrupters.) Replace the original scanner motor. Is the problem corrected? Replace the original scanner motor driver PCB. Is the problem corrected? Yes/No NO Action Replace the sensor (PS1).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 29 E220 Cause ------------ Step 1 Checks Does the scanning lamp turn on? Yes/No NO Connector, wiring 2 Is there a fault in the connection between J2004 on the CPU PCB and J450 on the lamp regulator PCB? YES Lamp regulator PCB, CPU PCB 13-124 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. NO Action See "The scanning lamp fails to turn on." Connect the connectors properly. Try replacing the following parts in turns: · lamp regulator PCB · CPU PCB CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 30 · E305 Check the detail code in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 32 E620 Cause Connector, wiring Step 1 IP-ED PCB IP-MAIN PCB 33 Checks Is the connection between J223/ J224 on the IP-ED PCB and J214/ J215 on the IP-MIAN PCB normal? Yes/No NO YES Action Connect the connectors properly. Try replacing the following parts in turns: · IP-ED PCB · IP-MAIN PCB Checks Is the lamp of the projector normal? Is the thermal switch of the projector on? Yes/No NO Action Replace the lamp.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 34 E700 Cause DC power supply PCB Step 1 Checks Is power present at J2010 on the CPU PCB? Voltage +5V -8V +8.8V +24V +15V (+) J2010-2 J2010-3 J2010-5 J2010-7 J2010-9 Action Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC power supply PCB. YES Replace the CPU PCB. Yes/No NO Action Disconnect it after executing service mode. YES Connect the connectors properly.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 36 E718 Cause Power supply PCB (projector) Connector, wiring Step 1 2 IP-PRJ PCB, IPMAIN PCB, CPU PCB 37 Checks Is the power supply PCB of the projector normal? Is the connection between J216/ J217,/J218 on the IP-MAIN PCB and J216/J241/J242 on the IP-PRJ PCB faulty? Yes/No NO Checks Turn off and then on the power switch.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 38 E804 Cause Fan DC driver PCB, CPU PCB COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Step 1 Checks Replace the fan indicated by the detail code. Is the problem corrected? Yes/No YES NO Action End. Check the wiring from the fan to the DC driver PCB or the CPU PCB; if normal, replace the DC driver PCB or the CPU PCB. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 39 AC power is absent. Cause Power plug Step 1 Power source 2 ------------ 3 Leakage breaker (ELB; faulty or off) 4 Checks Is the power lug connected to the power outlet? Is the rated AC voltage present at the power outlet? Yes/No NO Action Connect the power plug.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 40 DC power is absent. Cause AC power supply Step 1 Transfer unit lever switch (SW3), left front door switch (SW4), delivery door switch (SW5) DC power supply PCB 2 3 Checks Is AC power present between the following terminals? between J701-1 and J701-3 and between J701-2 and J701-4 on the DC power supply PCB Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the power plug; then, check each switch (SW3, SW4, SW5) for electrical continuity.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Wiring, DC load DC fuse PCB 13-132 Step 4 Checks Connect all connectors of the DC power supply PCB. Is the voltage of the connectors shown in the following table normal? Connector J906 J907 J908 J909 J910 J931 J932 J933 J934 J935 J936 J937 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 41 The original scanner fails to move forward/in reverse.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 The scanning lamp fails to turn on. Cause Scanning lamp Step 1 Scanner thermal switch (TP1, TP6) 2 Scanning lamp (open circuit) 3 Lamp regulator cover current 4 AC power supply 5 13-134 Checks Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the power plug. Is the lamp mounted properly? Check both terminals of the scanner thermal switch. Is there electrical continuity? Yes/No NO Action Mount the lamp properly.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause DC power Step 6 Lamp regulator 7 CPU PCB COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Checks Turn off the power switch, and connect J9. Set the meter range to 50 VDC, and turn on the power switch. Is 24 VDC present between J450-2 (+; 24 V) and J450-1 (-; GND)? Set the meter range to 50 VDC, and connect the probes to J450-10 (+; LAON) and J450-1 (-; GND) of the lamp regulator.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 43 The developing assembly fails to be locked in position. Cause Developing assembly locking motor (PM1, PM2, PM3, PM4) Cam, foreign matter, pressure leaf spring Step 1 Checks Does each developing assembly motor operate? Yes/No NO Action Check the connectors and wiring; if normal, replace the motor. 2 NO Replace the cam, replace the leaf spring, or remove the foreign matter. Gear, foreign matter 3 Remove the developing assembly drive assembly.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 44 The cassette lifter fails to move up. Cause Cassette Step 1 Latch (cassette) 2 Spring, lever 3 Lifter sensor (PS19, PS22, PS23) Cassette 1 lifter motor (M11, DM12), cassette 2 lifter motor (M12, DM13), cassette 3 lifter motor (M13) 4 M11, DM12, M12, DM13, M13 6 DC driver PCB, CPU PCB COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. 5 Checks Slide out the cassette, and move up the holding plate inside the cassette by hand.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 45 Pickup operation fails (cassette, duplexing unit). Checks Slide the cassette in and out. Is the sound of the lifter falling and the lifter motor turning heard? Is the drive belt routed properly? Yes/No NO Action See "The cassette lifter fails to move up." NO 3 Are the right front cover, left front cover, right lower cover, and left cover closed properly? NO Route the drive belt properly. Close the covers properly.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Pickup roller solenoid cassette 1 (SL7, DSL8) cassette 2 (SL8, DSL9) cassette 3 (SL9) duplexing feed roll solenoid (SL13) Step 9 Pickup clutch (CL11, DCL12, CL12, DCL13, CL13) 10 Pickup driver PCB, duplexing drive PCB DC drive PCB, CPU PCB 11 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Checks Turn off the power switch, and disconnect J346, J347, and J348 of the pickup driver PCB and J392 of duplexing driver PCB.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 46 Pickup operation fails (multifeeder). Cause Multifeeder pickup roller Multifeeder pickup clutch (CL16) Lifter plate Step 1 Multifeeder paper pickup solenoid (SL14) 4 Pickup driver PCB DC driver PCB, CPU PCB 5 13-140 2 3 Checks Is paper picked up, not slipping under the pickup roller? Select the multifeeder, and press the Copy Start key.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 47 The registration roller fails to rotate. Cause Gear, preregistration motor 2 (PM8), preregistration motor 1 (PM9) Registration roller clutch (CL9) Step 1 Checks Is the drive from the main motor and the pre-registration motor 1/2 transmitted to each roller through gears? Yes/No NO Action Check the motor (PM8, PM9) and the drive system (e.g., gears). 2 YES Replace the clutch.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 48 Attraction fails.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Service mode (COPIER> ADJUST>MISC> ATT-RTN) Step 14 Service mode (COPIER> ADJUST>HVATT; attraction high-voltage output adjustment mode) 15 Service mode (COPIER> ADJUST>HVATT; attraction high-voltage output adjustment mode) Attraction highvoltage system, internal/external static eliminator high-voltage system 16 Checks Does the problem occur in singlesided copying mode or when copying on the first side of a double-sided copy and also when copying on both sides of a dou
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 49 The pre-exposure lamp fails to turn off. Cause Pre-exposure lamp (LA1) Step 1 Pre-exposure lamp (LA1) DC driver PCB, CPU PCB 2 13-144 Checks Turn off the power switch, and disconnect J1008 of the DC driver PCB. Set the meter range to x100 Ω, and measure the resistance between J1008-A1 and -A2 on the harness side. Is it about 20Ω? Connect J1008, and turn on the power switch.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 50 The fixing heater fails to turn on. Cause Connector Step 1 ------------ 2 Thermal switch (TP2, TP3) Thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3, THM4) 3 Upper heater (H1) 5 Lower heater (H2) 6 AC harness COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. 4 Checks Are the fixing drawer connector J18 of the transfer drum frame and the connector J1024 of the DC driver PCB connected securely? Slide out the transfer drum frame.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause AC power supply Step 7 SSR1 8 Checks Slide in the transfer drum frame, and turn on the power switch.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 51 The drum heater fails to operate. Cause Environment switch (SW6) Step 1 Checks Turn off the environment switch.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 52 The cassette heater fails to operate. Cause Cassette heater switch (SW8) Environment switch (SW6) Step 1 Checks Is the cassette heater switch on? Yes/No NO Action Turn it on. 2 Turn off the environment switch.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 53 The copier generates abnormal noise.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING FAULTS A. Copy Paper Jams 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Jams in the copier tend to occur in any of the following locations: Pickup assembly Registration feeding assembly Transfer drum/cleaning assembly Separation/feeding assembly Fixing/delivery assembly Delivery vertical path/duplexing feeding assembly Duplexing unit/re-pickup assembly [5] [6] [4] [3] [2] [1] [7] Figure 13-501 13-150 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING You can check the location and the type of jam in the copier using its service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Pickup Assembly Cause -----------Cassette Step 1 2 Checks Is the paper from a cassette? Is the cassette set in the copier properly? Yes/No NO NO Copy paper 3 Is the copy paper curled or wavy? YES 4 Try paper of a type recommended by Canon.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Checks Try manual copying. Does the pickup roller of the multifeeder start to rotate? Try paper of a type recommended by Canon. Is the problem corrected? Is the transparency of a recommended type and placed in the correct orientation? Yes/No NO Action See "Pickup fails (multifeeder)." YES Advise the user to use recommended paper.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Registration Feeding Assembly Cause Copy paper Step 1 Checks Is the copy paper curled or wavy? Yes/No YES 2 Try paper of a type recommended by Canon.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Transfer Drum/Cleaning Assembly Checks Is the transfer drum sheet soiled or deformed? Is the internal/external static eliminator operating normally? Yes/No YES Is the pre-transfer/post-transfer sensor (PS5/PS6) operating normally? Is the attraction/transfer cam HP sensor (PS8) operating normally? NO 5 Are the brush and the blade operating normally? NO Pre-cleaning paper sensor 6 Is the pre-cleaning paper sensor operating normally? NO Internal brush 7 Is the intern
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 Separation/Feeding Assembly Cause Separation charging assembly Separation claw solenoid (SL4) Separation claw Step 1 Checks Is the separation charging assembly operating normally? Yes/No NO Action Check the separation charging assembly. 2 Is the separation claw solenoid (SL4) operating normally? Is the separation claw worn or deformed? NO Check the solenoid.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 Fixing/Delivery Assembly Cause Separation claw Fixing roller drive assembly Fixing upper/ lower roller Fixing inlet guide Step 1 2 Nip Fixing cleaning belt 5 6 Fixing thermistor 7 Delivery sensor lever Internal/external delivery sensor 8 Internal/external delivery roller drive assembly Delivery paper deflecting plate 10 Oil applying assembly 3 4 9 11 Checks Is the separation claw soiled? Does the fixing roller rotate smoothly? Is the upper/lower roller deformed
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 Delivery Vertical Path/Duplexing Feeding Assembly Cause Delivery paper deflecting plate Step 1 Checks Is the delivery paper deflecting plate operating normally? Yes/No NO Delivery vertical path roller 1/2/3 2 Is the delivery vertical path roller operating normally? NO External delivery sensor Delivery vertical path 1 sensor Delivery vertical path 2 sensor Duplexing feeding drive assembly Duplexing feeding assembly sensor Paper guide plate 3 Is each sensor (PS31, PS3
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 Duplexing Unit/Re-Pickup Assembly Cause Duplexing unit Step 1 Checks Is the duplexing unit set in the copier correctly? Yes/No NO Copy paper 2 YES Duplexing reversing roller Duplexing paper feed roller 3 Try paper of a type recommended by Canon.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING B. Feeding Faults 1 Double Feeding Cause Separation roller Step 1 Checks Is the separation roller deformed or worn? Pressure spring 2 Yes/No YES NO Action Replace the separation roll. Adjust the position of the pressure spring. Replace the pressure spring.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING VI. ARRANGEMENT OF ELECTRICAL PARTS A. Sensors 1.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING PS41 PS42 PS43 PS44 PS46 PS47 PS48 PS49 PS51 PS53 PS55 PS57 PS59 PS62 PS67 PS68L/S PS69L/S PS70L/S PS71 PSU2 PSU3 VR2 VR3 VR4 VR5 VR6 VR7 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 UN10 Right front cover sensor Left front cover sensor Delivery cover sensor Pickup cover sensor Cassette 1 open/closed sensor Cassette 2 open/closed sensor Cassette 3 open/closed sensor (CLC1130 only) M developing assembly HP sensor C developing assembly HP sensor Y developing assembly HP sensor Bk developing assembly HP sensor
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 2.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING PS37 PS40 PS41 PS42 PS43 PS44 DPS47 DPS48 PS49 PS51 PS53 PS55 PS57 PS59 PS62 PS67 PS68L/S PS69L/S PS70L/S PS71 DPSU3 DVR4 DVR5 DVR6 VR7 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 UN10 Duplexing inlet paper sensor Paper jogging guide HP sensor Right front cover sensor Left front cover sensor Delivery cover sensor Pickup cover sensor Cassette 1 open/closed sensor Cassette 2 open/closed sensor M developing assembly HP sensor C developing assembly HP sensor Y developing assembly HP sensor Bk developing assemb
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING B.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING C. Clutches 1.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 2.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING D. Solenoids 1.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 2.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING E.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING F.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 DM12 DM13 M14 M15 PM1 PM2 PM3 PM4 PM6 PM7 PM8 PM9 DPM11 DPM12 PM13 PM14 PM15 Drum motor Laser scanner motor Main motor Fixing motor Primary charging wire cleaning motor Cleaning blade reciprocating motor Transfer drum leaner brush motor Polishing roller motor Hopper motor Cassette 1 lifter motor Cassette 2 lifter motor Duplexing motor Multifeeder lifter motor M developing assembly locking motor C developing assembly locking motor Y developing assembly
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING G.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 Developing bias PCB HVT-AC PCB HVT-DC PCB Potential measurement PCB Main motor driver PCB Laser scanner motor PCB Hopper motor PCB IP-ED/IF PCB (accessory) IP-PRJ PCB (accessory) Flicker controller PCB (230-V model only) Transformer PCB [3] [8] [9] [29] [12] [5] [18] [7] [6] [14] [13] [37] [26] [31] Table 13-611b [20] [22] [21] [11] [41] [16] [17] [1] [27] [32] [40] [24] Figure 13-611b 13-174 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING H. Paper Deck 1.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 2. Motors, Clutches, Solenoids, and PCBs PM101 M101 CL102 SL101 SL102 [1] [2] Deck pickup motor Deck lifter motor Deck pickup clutch Deck pickup solenoid Deck open solenoid Deck driver PCB Deck open switch PCB Table 13-613 SL101 CL102 PM101 [2] [1] SL102 M101 Figure 13-613 13-176 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I. Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB Of the variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins used in the copier, those that may be used in the field are discussed. Caution: 1. Some LEDs emit light even when off because of leakage current. It is a normal condition, and must be kept in mind. 2. VRs that may be used in the field: VRs that must not be used it the field: 3.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Caution: If the copier is used in highlands (low atmospheric pressure), images may suffer from transfer faults. Try changing the setting of the DIP switch (SW1) to highland 1, and see if the problem is corrected; if the problem still occurs, switch SW1 to highland 2. If the problem still remains thereafter, shift SW1 back to its normal setting, and try to check other possible causes. 2.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING B24 B25 A24 A25 4. Analog Processor PCB J2105 1 J2100 B2 B1 A2 A1 J2101 8 1 J2102 11 1 J2104 6 1 J2103 13 Figure 13-617 5. Laser Driver PCB VR1 J1301 B1 8 14 1 16 A15 1 J1303 B15 J1302 J1304 A1 1 VR2 Figure 13-618 VR2: for Pmax adjustment of the laser. COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 6. Lamp Regulator PCB VR1 J9 1 1 J450 10 3 J10 1 4 VR2 Figure 13-619 7.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 8. AC Fuse PCB 1 J5 FU101 2 Figure 13-621 9. Developing Bias PCB VR506 1 J405 3 2 1 J404 VR509 10 J406 1 VR507 VR503 VR505 VR508 VR504 VR501 J401 1 41 7 J400 J402 VR502 Figure 13-622 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 10. HVT-AC PCB 1 10 5 J421 J105 1 VR102 J106 6 J104 1 VR103 1 2 J103 VR101 Figure 13-623 11. Potential Measurement PCB 1 4 1 J3 5 J1 1 4 J2 VR1 VR2 LED1 Figure 13-624 LED1: remains on while the surface potential of the drum is being measured. 13-182 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING VII. SERVICE MODE A. Outline The copier's service mode consists of three levels, each using its own screen: Initial screen, Level 1/Level 2 item Screen, and Level 3 item screen. User screen Reset key ( )(2,8)( ) Initial screen Reset key Select an item. Level 1/Level 2 item screen From Level 1/ Level 2 item screen Select a Level 1 item at the top of the screen. Select a Level 2 item from the list.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING The copier's service mode consists of the following seven: COPIER FEEDER DISPLAY Control/display mode SORTER PRJ EDITOR I/O I/O display mode ADJUST Adjustment mode FUNCTION Operation/inspection mode OPTION Settings mode TEST Test print mode COUNTER Counter mode Figure 13-702 Division of Service Mode 1. 1) 2) 3) · Starting Service Mode and Making Selections Press the asterisk key on the control panel. Press '2' and '8' on the keypad at the same time.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 2. Ending Service Mode · Press the Reset key once to bring back the service mode Initial screen (Figure 13-703). · Press the Reset key twice to end service mode and to bring back the User screen (standard screen). 3. Backing Up the RAM At time of shipment from the factory, each machine is adjusted individually and its adjustment values are recorded on the service label (one of the two labels attached to the service data sheet cover behind the front cover).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Back-Up Data Items ADJ-XY Adjust ADJ-X ADJ-Y ADJ-S ADJ-J LASER T-V00 T-VFF P3-V00 P3-VFF-1 P3-VFF-2 P3-VFF-3 P3-VFF-4 DENS SGNL-Y SGNL-M SGNL-C REF-Y REF-M REF-C SIGG-Y SIGG-M SIGG-C RGAIN-K D-Y-TRGT D-M-TRGT D-C-TRGT PTOFST-Y PTOFST-M PTOFST-C PTOFST-K D-REF-Y D-REF-M D-REF-C D-REF-K D-REF-4 D-SGNL-Y D-SGNL-M D-SGNL-C D-SGNL-K D-SGNL-4 13-186 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING DENS Adjust P-REF-Y P-REF-M P-REF-C P-REF-K P-SGNL-Y P-SGNL-M P-SGNL-C P-SGNL-K SIGG-K SIGG-P-M SIGG-P-C SIGG-P-Y SIGG-P-K RGAN-P-M RGAN-P-C RGAN-P-Y RGAN-P-K V-CONT VBACK-Y VBACK-M VBACK-C VBACK-K EPOTOFST PF-CRT-Y PF-CRT-M PF-CRT-C PF-CRT-K PASCAL OFST-P-Y OFST-P-M OFST-P-C OFST-P-K COLOR ADJ-Y ADJ-M ADJ-C ADJ-K OFST-Y OFST-M OFST-C OFST-K P-ADJ-Y COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COLOR Adjust P-ADJ-M P-ADJ-C P-ADJ-K P-OFST-Y P-OFST-M P-OFST-C P-OFST-K HV-TR TR-TR TR-L1 HV-L2 TR-N1 TR-N2 TR-T1 TR-T2 TR-UT1 TR-UT2 TR-S1-1 TR-S2-1 TR-OHP TR-POST HV-SP HV-SP SP-L1 SP-L2 SP-N1 SP-N2 SP-T1 SP-T2 SP-UT1 SP-UT2 SP-S1-1 SP-S2-1 SP-OHP SP-POST SP-ON-N1 SP-ON-N2 SP-ON-L1 SP-ON-L2 SP-ON-T1 SP-ON-T2 SP-ONUT1 13-188 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING HV-SP Adjust SP-ONUT2 SP-ON-S1 SP-ON-S2 SP-ONOHP SP-ON-PT HV-IEL HV-IEL IEL-L1 IEL-L2 IEL-N1 IEL-N2 IEL-T1 IEL-T2 IEL-UT1 IEL-UT2 IEL-S1-1 IEL-S2-1 IEL-OHP IEL-POST HV-ATT HV-ATT ATT-L1 ATT-L2 ATT-N1 ATT-N2 ATT-T1 ATT-T2 ATT-S1 ATT-S2 ATT-OHP ATT-UT1 ATT-UT2 ATT-POST DOC-REC DA-XS DA-XE DA-YS DA-YE DS-DOC COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING FEED-ADJ Adjust ATT-T-A ATT-T-B RG-XA RG-XB RG-Y TR-DLY-A TR-DLY-B TR-END-A TR-END-B CST-ADJ C2-STMTR C2-A4R C3-STMTR C3-A4R MF-A4R MF-A6R MF-A4 C1-LVOL C1-HVOL C2-LVOL C2-HVOL C3-LVOL C3-HVOL MISC SEG-ADJ K-ADJ ATT-RTN1 ATT-RTN2 ATT-RTN3 ATT-RTN4 BC-ADJ ACS-ADJ SENS-ADJ CLN-TH CLN-TMP 13-190 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING HV-SP-AC Adjust HV-SP SP-L1 SP-L2 SP-N1 SP-N2 SP-T1 SP-T2 SP-UT1 SP-UT2 SP-S1-1 SP-S2-1 SP-OHP SP-POST HV-PSTCL HV-PSTCL FEEDER ADJ-RX ADJ-RY ADJ-DX ADJ-DY PRJ DS-PRJ DS-OHP RD-XS RD-XE RD-YS RD-YE DA-XS DA-XE DA-YS DA-YE NEGA-B NEGA-G NEGA-R POSI-B POSI-G POSI-R N-LMT N-G-LMT P-LMT P-G-LMT COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING PRJ EDITOR 13-192 Adjust OHP-LMT P-DA-XS P-DA-XE P-DA-YS P-DA-YE N-DA-XS N-DA-XE N-DA-YS N-DA-YE O-DA-XS O-DA-XE O-DA-YS O-DA-YE CHNGR-X CHNGR-Y ED-X ED-Y LOOP-MB LOOP-TH MRK-MB MRK-TH COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING BODY Option CCD-DISP CVR-TYPE MODEL-SZ F-WEB PASCAL PSCL-MD EC-GLASS PSTCL-ON USER METAL OHP-MODE COPY-LIM COUNTER1 COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER6 CONTROL PRJ-L-SP BKL-L-SP CST P-SZ-C1 P-SZ-C2 ACC COIN DK-P INT-FACE REMOTE B-CLR P-PRT-MF COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 4. Basic Operation a. Initial Screen COPIER FEEDER Initial items Touch to select an item. SORTER PRJ EDITOR Figure 13-705 b. Level 1/Level 2 Item Screen Level 1 items Touch to select an item. VERSION CCD USER DPOT ACC-STS DENS ANALOG Level 2 items CST-STS Touch to select an item. SENSOR JAM ERR Figure 13-706 13-194 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING c. Level 3 Item Screen Number of pages < 1/3 > Level 2 items < READY > DC-CON R-CON ready for servicing/copying operation. jam exists. JAM: executing service operation. SERVICE: executing warm-up operation. WAITING: door is open. DOOR: COPYING: performing copying operation. error exits. ERROR: NO-TONER: toner is absent. fixing oil is absent. NO-OIL: WINR-FUL: waste toner case is full.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING B. DISPLAY (control display mode) The COPIER>DISPLAY screen looks like the following, and it provides the items shown on the next page. VERSION CCD USER DPOT ACC-STS DENS ANALOG CST-STS SENSOR JAM ERR Figure 13-709 The FEEDER>DISPLAY screen looks like the following, and it provides the item shown on the next page. < 1/1 > < READY > FEEDSIZE A4 Figure 13-710 13-196 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COPIER>DISPLAY Items Level 1 item Level 2 item Level 3 item Description DISPLAY VERSION DC-CON R-CON PANEL SCANNER ECO FEEDER SORTER IMG-CNT ROM version of the DC controller ROM version of the reader controller ROM version of the control panel controller ROM version of the scanner motor ROM version of the ECO PCB ROM version of the feeder controller ROM version of the sorter controller ROM version of the external image controller USER LANGUAGE language used ACC-STS FE
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING GAIN-OB GAIN-OG GAIN-OR CCD-TYPE METAL GAIN-EB GAIN-EG GAIN-ER BOF-OB BOFF-OG BOF-OR BOF-EB BOF-EG BOF-ER LAMP-DAT DPOT DPOT V00-Y V00-M V00-C V00-K VFF-Y VFF-M VFF-C VFF-K VDC-Y VDC-M VDC-C VDC-K VG-Y VG-M VG-C VG-K VCONT-Y VCONT-M VCONT-C VCONT-K VBACK-Y VBACK-M VBACK-C VBACK-K V00-500 V00-700 VFF-500 VFF-700 DV00-500 DVFF-500 DV00-700 13-198 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING DVFF-700 PFF-Y PFF-M PFF-C PFF-K DENS DENS-Y DENS-M DENS-C DENS-K WINDOW-Y WINDOW-M WINDOW-C WINDOW-K DMAX-Y DMAX-M DMAX-C DMAX-K VRATE-Y VRATE-M VRATE-C VRATE-K PTOFST-Y PTOFST-M PTOFST-C PTOFST-K D-Y-TRGT D-M-TRGT D-C-TRGT REF-Y REF-M REF-C SGNL-Y COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING SGNL-M SGNL-C PT-REF-Y PT-REF-M PT-REF-C PT-REF-K PT-SIG-Y PT-SIG-M PT-SIG-C PT-SIG-K PT-SIG-D PT-REF-D DMAX70-Y DMAX70-M DMAX70-C DMAX70-K SENSOR 13-200 SC-HP ITOP-A ITOP-B WEB W-TONER COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING PRJ>DISPLAY Items Level 1 item Level 2 item DISPLAY Level 3 item Description CHANGER TRAY T-KIND T-SET T-MOVE T-M-ERR T-HP-ERR T-L-MOVE T-POS L-MOVE M-EXCT L-POS LAMP-ERR auto changer (0: absent, 1: present) slide tray (0: absent, 1: present) tray type (0: 80, 1: 40) slide (0: absent, 1: present) tray (0: stationary, 1: moving) tray movement error (0: normal, 1: error) tray HP error (0: normal, 1: error) tray local movement (0: stationary, 1: moving) tray position (0: HP, 1
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING USER Indicates items related to the User screen and the user. Level 1 LANGUAGE Description Indicates the language used/paper size configuration. xx (first 2 digits): country code yy (last 2 digits): language code zz: destination code (00: CANON, 01: OEM) aa: paper size configuration code Code 00 01 02 03 COPIER>DISPLAY Remarks Configuration AB Inch A All sizes ACC-STS Indicates the state of connection of accessories.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING ANALOG Indicates the measurements taken by the analog sensor. Level 1 TEMP HUM ABS-HUM FIX-UC FIX-LC FIX-UE FIX-LE Description Indicates the machine internal temperature (environment sensor). Indicates the machine internal humidity (movement sensor). Indicates the machine internal absolute humidity. Indicates the temperature (THM1) of the middle of the fixing upper roller. Indicates the temperature (THM3) of the middle of the fixing lower roller.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING JAM Indicates jam data.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING FF: Type of Jam COPIER>DISPLAY Code 01xx 02xx 03xx 04xx Type delay stationary remaining service mode Code 05xx EExx FFxx Type sorter service call door open Table 13-701 ff: Jam Sensor xx01* xx02* xx03* xx04* xx05 xx06 xx09 xx10 xx11 xx12 xx20 xx30 xx40 Jam sensor pickup vertical path sensor (PS27) pickup vertical path sensor (PS26) pickup vertical path sensor 1 (PS21) re-pickup vertical path sensor (PS28) deck pickup sensor (PS101) multifeeder pickup sensor (PS9) pickup ve
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING ff: Detail of Sorter Jam Code xx03 xx04 xx06 xx07 COPIER>DISPLAY Type Code xx08 xx09 xx0A feeding delay feeding stationary staple jam power-on jam Type of jam door open jam (paper present) door open jam (paper absent) bin outside jam Table 13-702b G: Source of Paper Code 1 2 3 4 5 Description cassette 1 cassette 2 cassette 3 not used not used Code 6 7 8 9 Description not used paper deck multifeeder duplexing unit Table 13-703 13-206 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING ERR Indicates error codes.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING CCD Indicates the measurements related to the CCD.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING DPOT COPIER>DISPLAY Indicates the control data for the surface potential of the photosensitive drum.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COPIER>DISPLAY Level 3 VCONT-Y VCONT-M VCONT-C VCONT-K VBACK-Y VBACK-M VBACK-C VBACK-K V00-500 V00-700 VFF-500 VFF-700 DV00-500 DVFF-500 DV00-700 DVFF-700 PFF-Y PFF-M PFF-C PFF-K 13-210 Description setting (V) of Y for target contrast potential setting (V) of M for target contrast potential setting (V) of C for target contrast potential setting (V) of Bk for target contrast potential setting (V) of de-fogging potential for Y setting (V) of de-fogging potential for M setting (V)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING DENS Indicates the concentration of developer.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COPIER>DISPLAY Level 3 D-Y-TRGT D-M-TRGT D-C-TRGT REF-Y REF-M REF-C SGNL-Y SGNL-M SGNL-C PT-REF-Y PT-REF-M PT-REF-C PT-REF-K PT-SIG-Y PT-SIG-M PT-SIG-C PT-SIG-K PT-SIG-D PT-REF-D DMAX70-Y DMAX70-M DMAX70-C DMAX70-K 13-212 Description target value of Y developer concentration target value of M developer concentration target value of C developer concentration present value of the density reference signal for the Y developing assembly (direct light form (LED) present value of the
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING SENSOR COPIER>DISPLAY Indicates the state of sensors of particular importance for servicing work. Level 3 SC-HP Description output of the original scanner HP sensor (PS1) ITOP-A output of the side A sensor (PS2) ITOP-B output of side B sensor (PS3) WEB cleaning belt is out W-TONER case full COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Projector Level 3 CHANGER TRAY T-KIND T-SET T-MOVE T-M-ERR T-HP-ERR T-L-MOVE T-POS L-MOVE M-EXCT L-POS LAMP-ERR INITIAL LOCAL R/L PRJ>DISPLAY Description presence/absence of the auto changer presence/absence of the slide tray type of tray presence/absence of slides state of the tray tray movement error tray HP error tray local movement position of the tray lens movement state of motor excitation position of the lens open circuit in the lamp initialization local movement remote/l
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING C. I/O (I/O display mode) The Level 2 screen of I/O mode looks like the following, and it provides the items shown on the next page. DC-CON DC-CPU input/output port R-CON R-CPU input/output port Figure 13-713 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 1.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P003 P004 bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description hopper motor (M10) ready signal transfer drum cleaner brush motor (M8) ready signal not used duplexing motor (M14) ready signal laser scanner motor (M3) ready signal fixing motor (M5) ready signal drum motor (M2) ready signal main motor (M4) ready signal not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used paper deck connect signa
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P005 P006 bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 13-218 Description not used not used not used not used pickup holder model code 3 signal pickup holder model code 2 signal pickup holder model code 1 signal pickup holder model code 0 signal not used not used not used not used cassette 2 paper length sensor 1 (PSU2) signal cassette 2 paper length sensor 0 (PSU2) signal cassette 3 paper length sensor 1 (PSU3/DPSU3) sign
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P007 P008 bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description multifeeder lifter H sensor (PS17) signal multifeeder lifter L sensor (PS18) signal deck lifter upper limit sensor (PS103) signal not used not used cassette 1 lifter sensor (PS19) signal cassette 2 lifter sensor (PS22/DPS22) signal cassette 3 lifter sensor (PS23/DPS23) signal not used not used not used not used shutoff (SHUTOFF) error detection SSR2 error de
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P009 P00A 13-220 Description bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 not used not used not used not used not used C sensor (PS4) signal side B sensor (PS3) image leading edge signal 8 side A sensor (PS2) image leading edge signal 7 6 5 4 3 not used not used not used paper jogging guide HP sensor (PS40) signal attraction/transfer locking cam home position sensor (PS8) signal transfer drum cleaner HP sensor (PS59) signal transfer drum HP sensor (PS57) signal not used no
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P00B P00C bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description power supply cooling fan (FM9) error detection not used not used 24 V off detection (linked to door) not used internal static eliminator high voltage error HVT AC error detection cleaning blade reciprocating motor (M7) error detection buffer path unit locking cam sensor signal not used not used not used not used not used pre-cleaning paper sensor (PS71) sign
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P00D P00E 13-222 bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used fixing oil pump driver error detection 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 7 3 2 1 0 not used fixing upper thermistor open circuit detection fixing lower thermistor open circuit detection fixing upper heater error detection fixing lower heater error detection SSR1 (fixing upper heater side) error detection SSR1 (fixing lower heater si
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P00F P010 P011 P012 bit 15-0 15-0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description not used not used hard check output hard check output har d check output hard check output hard check output hard check output hard check output hard check output not used not used not used not used not used not used not used pre-exposure lamp (LA1) activation signal laser scanner motor (M3) clock switch signal transfer drum cleaner brush
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P013 P014 bit 15 Description state of the fixing heater 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 3 2 1 not used transparency sensor LED (PS69L) ON signal pre-cleaning paper sensor LED (PS71L) ON signal fixing upper heater drive signal fixing lower heater drive signal fixing oil pump (PSP1) drive signal SSR2 not used not used stopper plate solenoid (SL12) drive signal stopper plate solenoid (SL12) drive signal not used not used not used duplexing
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P015 P016 bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description not used not used not used not used counter 3 (CNT4) signal counter 2 (CNT3) signal counter 1 (CNT2) signal counter 0 (CNT1) signal registration jam timing signal deck sensor select signal 2 deck sensor select signal 1 deck sensor select signal 0 pre-registration jam timing signal pickup sensor select signal 2 pickup sensor select signal 1 pickup sensor sele
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P017 bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P018 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 13-226 Description not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used registration clutch (CL9) drive signal multifeeder feed clutch (CL10) drive signal multifeeder pickup clutch (CL16) drive signal deck pickup clutch (CL102) drive signal duplexing feed clutch (CL14) drive signal cassette 1 pickup clutch (CL1) drive signal cassette 2 pickup clutch
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P019 P01A bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description No. 3/No. 4 DC remote signal No. 3/No. 4 WBP remote signal No. 1/No. 2 DC remote signal No. 1/No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P01B P01C 13-228 bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description deck open sensor (PS109) signal deck set sensor (PS105) signal deck open switch (SW101) signal deck stack level upper sensor (PS107) signal deck paper level lower sensor (PS108) signal deck detection signal deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW102) signal not used not used not used hopper motor (M10) reverse rotation drive signal hopper motor
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P01D bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 P01E 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description not used not used multifeeder pickup solenoid (SL14) drive signal deck pickup roller releasing solenoid (SL101) drive signal duplexing paper feed roller solenoid (SL13) drive signal pickup roller 1 solenoid (SL7) pickup roller 2 solenoid (SL8/DSL8) pickup roller 3 solenoid (SL9/DSL9) buffer path unit solenoid (SL1) drive signal buffer path unit clutch (CL1)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P01F bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P020 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 13-230 Description not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used ozone suction fan (FM5) drive signal not used primary charging assembly fan (FM3) full speed drive signal primary charging assembly fan (FM3) half speed drive signal laser scanner motor cooling fan (FM4) drive signal not used electrical unit cooling fan (FM8) full speed drive si
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>DC-CON Address P021 P022 P023 P024 P025 P026 P027 P028 bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 Description not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used LD-J2DCON power switch off signal not used not used not used not used not used not used not used COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Remarks 1: download mode 1: OFF CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 2.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>R-CON Address P004 P005 P006 bit 15-8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15-8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15-8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Remarks Description not used internal signal internal signal internal signal internal signal internal signal internal signal internal signal internal signal not used RS-232C input signal scanner IPC error 3 scanner IPC error 2 scanner IPC error 1 scanning lamp (LA2) ON detection signal CVR error detection internal signal internal signal not used RS-232C output signal internal
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING I/O>R-CON Address P007 bit 15-8 7 6 5 4 3 2 P008 P009 1 0 15-8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15-8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 13-234 Description not used not used not used not used not used original exposure system cooling fan 2 (FM14) half speed drive signal original exposure system cooling fan 2 (FM14) full speed signal CC-X count signal CC-V count signal not used internal signal internal signal internal signal internal signal control switch (SW2) detection signal not used internal signal download
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING D. ADJUST (adjustment mode) The Level 2 screen of ADJUST mode looks like the following, and it provides the items shown on the next page. Figure 13-714 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COPIER>ADJUST Items Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Settings Description ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X -200 to +200 ADJ-Y -100 to +100 ADJ-S 0 to 32 ADJ-J 0 to 500 adjusts the image read start position (X direction; units of 0.1 mm) adjusts the image read start position (Y direction; in units of 0.1 mm) adjusts measurement position for shading correction from the standard white plate (in units of 0.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING DENS SGNL-Y 0 to 1023 SGNL-M 0 to 1023 SGNL-C 0 to 1023 REF-Y 0 to 1023 REF-M 0 to 1023 REF-C 0 to 1023 SIGG-Y 0 to 255 SIGG-M 0 to 255 SIGG-C 0 to 255 RGAIN-K 0 to 255 D-Y-TRGT 0 to 1023 D-M-TRGT 0 to 1023 D-C-TRGT 0 to 1023 PTOFST-Y -127 to +128 PTOFST-M -127 to +128 PTOFST-C -127 to +128 PTOFST-K -127 to +128 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING D-SGNL-Y 0 to 1023 D-SGNL-M 0 to 1023 D-SGNL-C 0 to 1023 D-SGNL-K 0 to 1023 D-SGNL-4 0 to 1023 P-REF-Y 0 to 1023 P-REF-M 0 to 1023 P-REF-C 0 to 1023 P-REF-K 0 to 1023 P-SGNL-Y 0 to 1023 P-SGNL-M 0 to 1023 P-SGNL-C 0 to 1023 P-SGNL-K 0 to 1023 SIGG-K 0 to 255 SIGG-P-M 0 to 255 SIGG-P-C 0 to 255 SIGG-P-Y 0 to 255 SIGG-P-K 0 to 255 RGAN-P-M 0 to 255 RGAN-P-C 0 to 255 RGAN-P-Y 0 to 255 13-238 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING V-CONT RGAN-P-K 0 to 255 correction of the patch gain for toner density control when INIT-K is executed VBACK-Y -4 to +4 Y color adjustment for de-fogging potential (reference: 0) M color adjustment for de-fogging potential (reference: 0) C color adjustment for de-fogging potential (reference: 0) Bk color adjustment for de-fogging potential (reference: 0) potential offset value (reference: 0) offset value adjustment (%) for Y laser strength offset value adjustment (%) for M l
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING P-OFST-M -16 to +16 P-OFST-C -16 to +16 P-OFST-K -16 to +16 HV-TR Cont'd 13-240 HV-TR -4 to +4 TR-L1 -4 to +4 TR-L2 -4 to +4 TR-N1 -4 to +4 TR-N2 -4 to +4 TR-T1 -4 to +4 TR-T2 -4 to +4 TR-UT1 -4 to +4 TR-UT2 -4 to +4 TR-S1-1 -4 to +4 TR-S2-1 -4 to +4 TR-OHP -4 to +4 TR-POST -4 to +4 color balance adjustment of M light areas for output from an external image controller color balance adjustment of C light areas for output from an external image contro
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cont'd COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING TR-L1 -4 to +4 TR-L2 -4 to +4 TR-N1 -4 to +4 TR-N2 -4 to +4 TR-T1 -4 to +4 TR-T2 -4 to +4 TR-UT1 -4 to +4 TR-UT2 -4 to +4 TR-S1-1 -4 to +4 TR-S2-1 -4 to +4 TR-OHP -4 to +4 TR-POST -4 to +4 Environment C (C-ZONE) for thin paper, transfer charging bias adjustment for single-sided copying or copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy (in units of µA) for thin paper, transfer charging bias adjustment for copying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copy (in u
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING HV-SP Cont'd COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cont'd 13-244 SP-L1 -6 to 0 SP-L2 -6 to 0 SP-N1 -6 to 0 SP-N2 -6 to 0 SP-T1 -6 to 0 SP-T2 -6 to 0 SP-UT1 -6 to 0 SP-UT2 -6 to 0 SP-S1-1 -6 to 0 SP-S2-1 -6 to 0 SP-OHP -6 to 0 SP-POST -6 to 0 Environment A (A-ZONE) for thin paper, separation charging bias adjustment for single-sided copying or copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy (in units of 50 µA) for thin paper, separation charging bias adjustment for copying on the 2nd side of a double-sided
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cont'd COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING SP-ON-N1 1 to 32 SP-ON-N2 1 to 32 SP-ON-L1 1 to 32 SP-ON-L2 1 to 32 SP-ON-T1 1 to 32 SP-ON-T2 1 to 32 SP-ONUT1 1 to 32 SP-ONUT2 1 to 32 SP-ON-S1 1 to 32 SP-ON-S2 1 to 32 SP-ONOHP 1 to 32 SP-ON-PT 1 to 32 for plain paper, separation re-charging ON environment adjustment value for singlesided copying or copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy (in units of 50 µA) for plain paper, separation re-charging ON environment adjustment value for copying on the 2nd sid
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING HV-IEL Cont'd COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. HV-IEL -8 to 0 IEL-L1 -8 to 0 IEL-L2 -8 to 0 IEL-N1 -8 to 0 IEL-N2 -8 to 0 IEL-T1 -8 to 0 IEL-T2 -8 to 0 IEL-UT1 -8 to 0 IEL-UT2 -8 to 0 IEL-S1-1 -8 to 0 IEL-S2-1 -8 to 0 IEL-OHP -8 to 0 IEL-POST -8 to 0 internal static eliminator high-voltage output adjustment (in units of 0.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cont'd 13-248 IEL-L1 -8 to 0 IEL-L2 -8 to 0 IEL-N1 -8 to 0 IEL-N2 -8 to 0 IEL-T1 -8 to 0 IEL-T2 -8 to 0 IEL-UT1 -8 to 0 IEL-UT2 -8 to 0 IEL-S1-1 -8 to 0 IEL-S2-1 -8 to 0 IEL-OHP -8 to 0 IEL-POST -8 to 0 Environment B (B-ZONE) for thin paper, internal static eliminator bias adjustment for single-sided copying or copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy (in units of 0.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING IEL-L1 -8 to 0 IEL-L2 -8 to 0 IEL-N1 -8 to 0 IEL-N2 -8 to 0 IEL-T1 -8 to 0 IEL-T2 -8 to 0 IEL-UT1 -8 to 0 IEL-UT2 -8 to 0 IEL-S1-1 -8 to 0 IEL-S2-1 -8 to 0 IEL-OHP -8 to 0 IEL-POST -8 to 0 Environment C (C-ZONE) for thin paper, internal static eliminator bias adjustment for single-sided copying or copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy (in units of 0.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING HV-ATT HV-ATT -5 to +5 ATT-L1 -5 to +5 ATT-L2 -5 to +5 ATT-N1 -5 to +5 ATT-N2 -5 to +5 ATT-T1 -5 to +5 ATT-T2 -5 to +5 ATT-S1 -5 to +5 ATT-S2 -5 to +5 ATT-OHP -5 to +5 ATT-UT1 -5 to +5 ATT-UT2 -5 to +5 ATT-POST -5 to +5 Cont'd 13-250 attraction high-voltage output adjustment (in units of 2 µA) Environment A (A-ZONE) for thin paper, attraction high-voltage output adjustment for single-sided copying or copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy (in u
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING ATT-L1 -5 to +5 ATT-L2 -5 to +5 ATT-N1 -5 to +5 ATT-N2 -5 to +5 ATT-T1 -5 to +5 ATT-T2 -5 to +5 ATT-S1 -5 to +5 ATT-S2 -5 to +5 ATT-OHP -5 to +5 ATT-UT1 -5 to +5 ATT-UT2 -5 to +5 ATT-POST -5 to +5 Cont'd COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING ATT-L1 -5 to +5 ATT-L2 -5 to +5 ATT-N1 -5 to +5 ATT-N2 -5 to +5 ATT-T1 -5 to +5 ATT-T2 -5 to +5 ATT-S1 -5 to +5 ATT-S2 -5 to +5 ATT-OHP -5 to +5 ATT-UT1 -5 to +5 ATT-UT2 -5 to +5 ATT-POST -5 to +5 Environment C (C-ZONE) for thin paper, attraction high-voltage output adjustment for single-sided copying or copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy (in units of 2 µA) for thin paper, attraction high-voltage output adjustment for copying on the 2nd side of
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING DOC-REC DX-XS DA-XE DA-YS DA-YE DS-DOC -99 to +99 -99 to +99 -99 to +99 -99 to +99 0 to 31 fine-adjustment of the original detection area fine-adjustment of the original detection area fine-adjustment of the original detection area fine-adjustment of the original detection area adjustment of the slice level for original detection FEED-ADJ ATT-T-A -10 to +10 ATT-T-B -10 to +10 RG-XA -47 to +47 RG-XB -47 to +47 RG-Y -70 to +70 adjustment of side A attraction timing f
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING TR-END-A 0 to 25 TR-END-B 0 to 25 CST-ADJ C2-STMTR 0 to 1023 C2-A4R 0 to 1023 C3-STMTR 0 to 1023 MISC C3-A4R 0 to 1023 MF-A4R 0 to 1023 MF-A6R 0 to 1023 MF-A4 0 to 1023 C1-LVOL 0 to 1023 C1-HVOL 0 to 1023 C2-LVOL 0 to 1023 C2-HVOL 0 to 1023 C3-LVOL 0 to 1023 C3-HVOL 0 to 1023 SEG-ADJ -3 to +3 K-ADJ -3 to +3 ATT-RTN1 0 to 1 ATT-RTN2 0 to 1 ATT-RTN3 0 to 1 ATT-RTN4 0 to 1 BC-ADJ -3 to +3 ACS-ADJ 0 to 1 adjusts the falling edge (trailing edge margin)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING SENS-ADJ CLN-TH 2300 to 5500 CLN-TMP 0 to 60 HV-SP-AC Cont'd COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Cont'd 13-256 SP-L1 4 to +4 SP-L2 -4 to +4 SP-N1 -4 to +4 SP-N2 -4 to +4 SP-T1 -4 to +4 SP-T2 -4 to +4 SP-UT1 -4 to +4 SP-UT2 -4 to +4 SP-S1-1 -4 to +4 SP-S2-1 -4 to +4 SP-OHP -4 to +4 SP-POST -4 to +4 Environment B (B-ZONE) for thin paper, separation charging AC bias adjustment for single-sided copying or copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy (in units of 0.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING HV-PSTCL COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. SP-L1 -4 to +4 SP-L2 -4 to +4 SP-N1 -4 to +4 SP-N2 -4 to +4 SP-T1 -4 to +4 SP-T2 -4 to +4 SP-UT1 -4 to +4 SP-UT2 -4 to +4 SP-S1-1 -4 to +4 SP-S2-1 -4 to +4 SP-OHP -4 to +4 SP-POST -4 to +4 HV-PSTCL -6 to +6 Environment C (C-ZONE) for thin paper, separation charging AC bias adjustment for single-sided copying or copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy (in units of 0.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDER>ADJUST Items Level 1 Level 2 ADJUST Level 3 Settings Description ADJ-RX 0 to 255 ADJ-RY 0 to 255 ADJ-DX 0 to 255 ADJ-DY 0 to 255 adjustment of registration in sub scanning direction with the multifeeder in use (in units of 0.1 mm) adjustment of registration in main scanning direction with the multifeeder in use (in units of 0.1 mm) adjustment of registration in sub scanning direction with the multifeeder in use in manual feed mode (in units of 0.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING NEGA-B -100 to +100 NAGA-G -100 to +100 NEGA-R -100 to +100 POSI-B -100 to +100 POSI-G -100 to +100 POSI-R -100 to +100 N-LMT 0 to 255 N-G-LMT 0 to 255 P-LMT 0 to 255 P-G-LMT 0 to 255 OHP-LMT 0 to 255 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING N-DA-XE -99 to +99 N-DA-YS -99 to +99 N-DA-YE -99 to +99 O-DA-XS -99 to +99 O-DA-XE -99 to +99 O-DA-YS -99 to +99 O-DA-YE -99 to +99 CHNGR-X -99 to +99 CHNGR-Y -99 to +99 adjustment of frame erasing width for negative film with the projector in use (in units of 0.6 mm; standard: 50) adjustment of frame erasing width for negative film with the projector in use (in units of 0.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING ADJ-XY Indicates the image read start position. Level 3 ADJ-X (Note 1) COPIER>ADJUST Description Use it to make adjustments so that the image read position matches the reference point on the copyboard glass. Fine-adjusts the distance between the original scanner HP sensor to the read start position. · Unit: number of steps from the stepping motor · Make adjustments as shown in the next page. Remarks -200 to +200 (-3.9 to +3.9 mm) Unit: about 0.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Level 3 ADJ-S (Note 1) Description Use it to fine-adjust the position at which data is collected for shading correction from the standard white plate. · Unit: number of steps from the stepping motor · Scratches or dirt on the standard plate can cause vertical white lines on copies. To correct the problem, shift the point of measurement using this item. Remarks 0 to 45 (0 to 4.8 mm) Unit: about 0.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING LASER Adjusts the laser system. Level 3 T-V00 T-VFF P3-V00 P3-VFF-1 P3-VFF-2 P3-VFF-3 P3-VFF-4 POWER T-V00-ON T-VFF-ON P3V00-ON P3-V1-ON P3-V2-ON P3-V3-ON P3-V4-ON Description Use it to enter the laser control initial value at V00 for text mode (800 lines) as upon replacement of the laser unit. Use it to enter the laser control initial value at VFF for text mode (800 lines) as upon replacement of the laser unit.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING DENS Adjusts items related to developer concentration. Level 3 SGNL-Y SGNL-M SGNL-C (Note 1) REF-Y REF-M REF-C (Note 1) SIGG-Y SIGG-M SIGG-C (Note 1) RGAIN-K (Note 1) D-Y-TRGT D-M-TRGT D-C-TRGT (Note 1) PTOFST-Y PTOFST-M PTOFST-C PTOFST-K (Note 1) D-REF-Y D-REF-M D-REF-C D-REF-K D-REF-4 (Not 1) Description Use it to adjust the toner concentration signal value of each color during INIT for ATR control.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Level 3 D-SGNL-Y D-SGNL-M D-SGNL-C D-SGNL-K D-SGNL-4 (Note 1) P-REF-Y P-REF-M P-REF-C P-REF-K (Note 1) P-SGNL-Y P-SGNL-M P-SGNL-C P-SGNL-K (Note 1) SIGG-K (Note 1) SIGG-P-M SIGG-P-C SIGG-P-Y SIGG-P-K (Note 1) RGAN-P-M RGAN-P-C RGAN-P-Y RGAN-P-K (Note 1) Description Use it to adjust the signal value (during initialization) for the toner concentration sensor of each color in relation to light reflected by the photosensitive drum.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING V-CONT Adjusts the photosensitive drum surface potential contrast. Level 3 VBACK-Y VBACK-M VBACK-C VBACK-K EPOTOFST Description Use it to adjust the de-fogging potential for each color. PF-CRT-Y PF-CRT-M PF-CRT-C PF-CRT-K Use it to adjust the offset value (%) of laser strength for each color. Use it to adjust the potential offset value.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COLOR Adjusts the color balance. Level 3 ADJ-Y ADJ-M ADJ-C ADJ-K (Note 1) OFST-Y OFST-M OFST-C OFST-K (Note 1) P-ADJ-Y P-ADJ-M P-ADJ-C P-ADJ-K (Note 1) P-OFST-Y P-OFST-M P-OFST-C P-OFST-K (Note 1) Description Use it to correct the color balance of each color selected by the user. · Be sure to set the user color balance to '0' before using this item. · Be sure to follow the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING HV-TR Adjusts the transfer high-voltage output by condition. Level 3 HV-TR Description Use it to adjust the transfer high-voltage output. TR-L1 Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias for singlesided copying and when copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy using thin paper. Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias when copying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copy using thin paper.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING HV-SP Adjusts the separation charging high-voltage output by condition. Level 3 HV-SP SP-L1 SP-L2 SP-N1 SP-N2 SP-T1 SP-T2 SP-UT1 SP-UT2 SP-S1-1 SP-S2-1 SP-OHP SP-POST Description Use it to adjust the separation DC high-voltage output. Use it to adjust the separation charging bias for single-sided copying and when copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy using thin paper.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COPIER>ADJUST Level 3 SP-ON-N1 SP-ON-N2 SP-ON-L1 SP-CN-L2 SP-ON-T1 SP-ON-T2 SP-ONUT1 SP-ONUT2 SP-ON-S1 SP-ON-S2 SP-ONOHP SP-ON-PT Description Use it to adjust the separation re-charging ON environment adjustment value for single-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of a doublesided copy. Use it to adjust the separation re-charging ON environment adjustment value for copying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copy using plain paper.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING HV-IEL COPIER>ADJUST Adjusts the internal static eliminating high-voltage output by condition. Level 3 HV-IEL IEL-L1 IEL-L2 IEL-N1 IEL-N2 IEL-T1 IEL-T2 IEL-UT1 IEL-UT2 IEL-S1-1 IEL-S2-1 IEL-OHP IEL-POST Description Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating highvoltage output. Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating bias for single-sided copying and when copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy using thin paper.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING HV-ATT Adjusts the attraction charging high-voltage output by condition. Level 3 HV-ATT Description Use it to adjust the attraction high-voltage output. ATT-L1 Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias for single-sided copying and when copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy using thin paper. Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias when copying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copy using thin paper.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING DOC-REC Adjusts the original detection area/slice level. Level 3 DA-XS DA-XE DA-YS DA-YE (Note 1) COPIER>ADJUST Description Fine-Adjusting the Original Detection Area If an original is placed on the copyboard glass at an angle, its copy will be framed in black by the work of original detection mode. Use this item to make settings so as to remove such frames.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING FEED-ADJ Level 3 ATT-T-A ATT-T-B RG-XA RG-XB RG-Y TR-DLY-A TR-DLY-B ATT-CHK ATT-ON RGST-CHK RGST-ON TR1-CHK TR2-CHK TR1-ON TR2-ON TR3-ON TR4-ON 13-274 COPIER>ADJUST Description Use it to enter a transfer drum side A attraction timing adjustment value. Use it to enter a transfer drum side B attraction timing adjustment value. Use it to enter a registration (point of attraction) fine-adjustment value for transfer drum side A sub scanning direction (feeding direction).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COPIER>ADJUST Level 3 TR-END-A TR-END-B Description Use it to adjust the falling edge (trailing edge margin) of transfer high voltage for side A retention. Use it to adjust the falling edge (training edge margin) of transfer high voltage for side B retention. · Be sure to make adjustments whenever you have replaced the transfer drum unit. · A lower setting will shift the point at which blurring starts toward the trailing edge. Remarks 0 to 25 Unit: 0.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MISC Level 3 SEG-ADJ K-ADJ ATT-RTN1 ATT-RTN2 ATT-RTN3 ATT-RTN4 BC-ADJ ACS-ADJ COPIER>ADJUST Description Use it to adjust the separation level between text and photo in text/photo mode or text/silver halide mode. Use it to correct the black text mechanism. Use it to add a single rotation to attraction rotation for single-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of double-sided copying using plain paper (full color).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING HV-SP-AC Adjusts the separation charging AC high-voltage output by condition. Level 3 HV-SP (Note 1) SP-N1 SP-N2 SP-T1 SP-T2 SP-UT1 SP-UT2 SP-S1-1 SP-S2-1 SP-OHP SP-POST SP-L1 SP-L2 (Note 1) Description Use it to adjust the separation AC high-voltage output. Use it to adjust the separation charging bias for single-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy using plain paper.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING HV-PSTCL Adjusts the post-cleaning high-voltage output. Level 1 HV-PSTCL (Note 1) Description Adjusting the Post-Cleaning High Voltage · Increase the setting if a width of about 5 cm along the leading edge of paper is dark when making halftone copies. COPIER>ADJUST Remarks -6 to +6 Unit: 20 µA Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Projector-Related Items Level 3 DS-PRJ DS-OHP RD-XS RD-XE RD-YS RD-YE DA-XS DA-XE DA-YS DA-YE PRJ>ADJUST Description Use it to adjust the slice level for projection area detection with the projector in use. Use it to adjust the slice level for original detection in reference to the reference sheet of film (e.g., 6x6, 8x10) placed on the copyboard glass with the projector in use.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING PRJ>ADJUST Level 3 NEGA-B NEGA-G NEGA-R POSI-B POSI-G POSI-R N-LMT N-G-LMT P-LMT P-G-LMT OHP-LMT P-DA-XS P-DA-XE P-DA-YS P-DA-YE Description Use it to adjust the target value for shading correction when copying negative film with the projector in use. Use it to adjust the target value for shading correction when copying positive film with the projector in use.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Editor-Related Items Level 3 ED-X ED-Y (Note 1) EDITOR>ADJUST Description Use it to adjust the input coordinates in editor sub scanning (X) direction. Use it to adjust the input coordinates in editor main scanning (Y) direction. Remarks -99 to +99 Unit: 0.13 mm (approx.) Standard: 0 ED-X ED-Y LOOP-MB (Note 1) LOOP-TH (Note 1) MRK-MB MRK-TH Use it to adjust processing for reading images into memory when coloring in area select/color create mode.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING E. FUNCTION (operation check mode) The COPIER>FUNCTION screen looks like the following, and it offers the items shown on the pages that follow: BODY USER CST ACC INT-FACE Figure 13-717 13-282 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COPIER>FUNCTION Items Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Description FUNCTION INSTALL SPLY-Y rotates the cylinder to supply Y developer to the developing assembly (OK key to start, Stop key to stop) rotates the cylinder to supply M developer to the developing assembly (OK key to start, Stop key to stop) rotates the cylinder to supply C developer to the developing assembly (OK key to start, Stop key to stop) rotates the cylinder to supply Bk developer to the developing assembly (OK ke
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING stirs the toner inside the M hopper at time of installation (OK key to start; auto stop) stirs the toner inside the C hopper at time of installation (OK key to start; auto stop) stirs the toner inside the Bk hopper at time of installation (OK key to start; auto stop) stirs the toner inside the four color hoppers at time of installation (OK key to start; auto stop) reads black toner concentration sensor output data once again (OK key to start; auto stop) for R&D HP-STR-M HP-STR-C
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING DPC TR2-ON executes printing for checking an 8-mm leading edge margin according to TR2-CHK settings (OK key to start; auto stop) DPC executes measurement of potential on the photosensitive drum (OK key to start; auto stop) executes offset adjustment of the potential measurement circuit of the photosensitive drum (OK key to start; auto stop) executes initialization of the photosensitive drum potential measurement data (OK key to start; auto stop) stores paper width detection r
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MTR selects each motor (enter the part No., and press the OK key to select) starts the operation of the motor selected in 'MTR' (OK key to start; auto stop in 20 sec) selects each solenoid (enter part No., and press OK key to select) starts the operation of the solenoid selected in 'SL' (OK key to start; Stop key to stop) selects each high-voltage output (enter high-voltage No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING PRJ>FUNCTION Items Level 1 Level 2 FUNCTION Level 3 Description LAMP drives the projector lamp for a specific period of time (OK key to start; auto stop) reads in data and executes gain adjustment at time of projector installation (OK key to start; auto stop) CCD COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALL Used at time of installation. Level 3 SPLY-Y SPLY-M SPLY-C SPLY-K STIR-Y STIR-M STIR-C STIR-K STIR-4 INIT-Y INIT-M INIT-C INIT-K INIT-4 RECV-Y RECV-M RECV-C RECV-K COPIER>FUNCTION Description Use it to rotate the developing cylinder to supply a specific color developer to the developing assembly. Using the Item 1) Select an item (to highlight), and press the OK key. 2) To stop, press the Stop key.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Level 3 HP-STR-Y HP-STR-M HP-STR-C HP-STR-K Description Use it to stir the toner inside a specific color hopper to prevent blocking at time of installation and hopper unit replacement. Using the Item 1) Select an item (to highlight), and press the OK key. 2) The operation will stop automatically in about 30 sec.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING CCD Executes automatic adjustment of CCD-/shading-related items. Level 3 CCD-ADJ Description Use it to execute shading correction using the standard white plate. Using the Item 1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK key. 2) The operation will stop automatically, and the result will be indicated. Caution: Do not open the front cover while executing this mode. Otherwise, the CCD adjustment may fail.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING ATTRACT Executes attraction point auto adjustment. Level 3 ATT-CHK ATT-ON RGST-CHK RGST-ON TRI-CHK TRI-ON COPIER>FUNCTION Description Use it to select a point of attraction on the transfer drum during ATT-ON. 1: 2-sheet retention (sides B and A) 2: side A retention 3: side B retention Use it to execute attraction of copy paper to the transfer drum according to ATT-CHK settings. This item uses the source of paper selected before starting service mode.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COPIER>FUNCTION Level 3 TR2-CHK TR2-ON Description Use it to select a point of attraction on the transfer drum during TR2-ON. 1: 2-sheet retention (sides B and A) 2: side A detecting 3: side B retention Use it to execute printing for checking an 8-mm leading edge margin according to TR2-CHK settings. This mode uses the source of paper selected before starting service mode. Using the Item 1) Select an item (to highlight), and press the OK key.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING CST Executes cassette/multifeeder size auto adjustment. Level 3 C2-STMTR C2-A4R C3-STMTR C3-A4R MF-A4R MF-A6R MF-A4 Description Use it to store the paper width detection reference point for cassette 2/3 (for CLC1150, cassette 3). Using ht Item 1) Adjust the side guide pal of the bottommost cassette to STMTR. 2) Select C2-STMTR or C3-STMTR (to highlight), and press the OK key. 3) Likewise, store a reference point for A4R size.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING FIXING Executes automatic adjustment of fixing assembly-related items. Level 3 NIP-CHK Description Use it to generate an output for measuring the fixing nip width. This mode uses the source of paper selected before service mode is started. Using the Item 1) Make about 20 copies of the Test Sheet in A4. 2) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK key. 3) A cyan image will automatically be prepared and discharged. 4) Measure the width of the area indicated in the figure.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING PANEL Checks the activation of the indicators on the control panel. Level 3 LCD-CHK LED-CHK LED-OFF KEY-CHK TOUCHCHK Description Use it to check the LCD for missing dots. Using the Item 1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK key. · The entire LCD will alternately turn on white, and then blue. 2) To stop, press the Stop key. Use it to start a check on the LEDs on the control panel. Using the Item 1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK key.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Input Keys and Indications Key Counter Check ACS Full Color Black Original Recognition Center Shift Energy Saver Stop COPIER>FUNCTION Indication Key BILL ACS F-COLOR BLACK SIZE C-SHIFT STAND BY STOP Start Clear 0 to 9 ID Interrupt Additional Function Guide Reset Indication START CLEAR 0 to 9 ID INTERRUPT USER ? RESET Table 13-701 PART-CHK Checks the operation of various loads. Level 3 CL CL-ON FAN FAN-ON MTR 13-296 Description Use it to select the clutch to check.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COPIER>FUNCTION Level 3 MTR-ON SL SL-ON SHV SHV-ON Description Use it to check the operation of the motor selected using MTR. Using the Item 1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK key. · The motor will turn on. 2) In about 20 sec, the operation will stop automatically. Use it to select the solenoid to check. Using the Item 1) Select the item (to highlight). 2) Enter the code of the solenoid using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Codes and Fans Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 COPIER>FUNCTION Name electrical unit cooling fan (FM8) IP cooling fan (FM7) exhaust fan (FM2) ozone suction fan (FM5) toner suction fan (FM6) laser scanner motor cooling fan (FM4) Code 6 7 8 9 10 11 Name not used primary charging assembly fan (FM3) delivery cooling fan (FM11) original exposure cooling fan 1 (FM1) not used original exposure system cooling fan 2/3 (FM14/15) Table 13-703 Codes and Motors Code 0 1 2 3 Name hopper motor (M10) tran
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Codes and High-Voltage Outputs Code 0 1 COPIER>FUNCTION High-voltage output --primary output, grid output 2 primary output, grid output, M color developing bias output 3 primary output, grid output, C developing bias output Description Absence of high-voltage output drum motor ON pre-exposure lamp ON photosensitive drum 1 rotation primary output, grid output (500 V) ON (wait for stop command; equivalent of photosensitive drum 10 rotations) primary output, grid output OFF p
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COPIER>FUNCTION Code 4 High-voltage output primary output, grid output, Y developing assembly bias output 5 primary output, grid output, Bk color developing bias output Description drum motor ON pr-exposure lamp ON photosensitive drum 1 rotation primary output, grid output (500 V) ON Y developing assembly locked, developing bias (AC/DC) ON (wait for stop command; equivalent of photosensitive drum 10 rotations) Y developing assembly unlocked, developing bias (AC/DC) OFF primar
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING CLEAR Initializes the RAM, and resets the jam/ error history. Level 3 ERR DC-CON R-CON MMI-COPY SERVICE JAM-HIST ERR-HIST E354-CLR E355-CLR Description Use it to reset an error code (E000, E004, E005, E008, E020, E717). Using the Item 1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the power switch. Use it to initialize the RAM of the DC-CPU on the CPU PCB. Using the Item 1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK key.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MISC-R Checks the operation of the reader unit. Level 3 SCANLAMP SC-MOVE RESERVE 1 to 4 Description Use it t check the activation of the scanning lamp. Using the Item 1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK key. 2) The scanning lamp will remain on for several seconds, and then will turn off automatically. Use it to check the operation of the scanner. Using the Item 1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK key.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COPIER>FUNCTION Level 3 B-HP B-ATT-TR B-TR B-CLN Remarks Description Use it to rotate the attraction/transfer locking cam motor, thereby moving the cam to the home position (HP). Using the Item 1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK key. 2) The attraction/transfer locking cam will stop at HP. Use it to rotate the attraction/transfer locking cam motor, thereby moving the cam to the point of attraction/transfer.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Projector-Related Items Level 3 LAMP CCD 13-304 PRJ>FUNCTION Description Use it to keep the lamp of the projector on for a specific period of time. Using the Item 1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK key. 2) The lamp of the projector will remain on for about 1 min, and will turn off automatically. Use it to read CCD gain adjustment and data at time of installing a projector. Using the Item 1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK key.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING F. OPTION (settings mode) The COPIER>OPTION screen looks like the following, and it offers the items shown on the pages that follow: BODY USER CST ACC INT-FACE Figure 13-718 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COPIER>OPTION Items Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Description OPTION BODY CCD-DISP use it to switch data display on the DISPLAY>CCD screen (0: normal mode, 1: precious metal mode) use it to enter a CVR version (0: normal, 1: new type) use it to switch destination (0: AB (6R, 5E), 1: Inch (5R, 4E), 2: A (3R, 3E), 3: AB/Inch (6R, 5E) use it to change the frequency of turning on the fixing cleaning belt (1 through 255; default=1) use it to switch gradation correction data, contrast
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING CST BKL-L-SP use it to prohibit 2-side retention in color copying mode (other than black mono) with back light mode selected (0: normal, 1: prohibit) P-SZ-C1 use it to select a paper size for cassette (Table 13708) use it to select a paper size for cassette 2 (for CLC1150, cassette 1; Table 13-708) P-SZ-C2 DK-P ACC COIN INT-FACE REMOTE B-CLR P-PRT-MF COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING PRJ>OPTION Items Level 1 Level 2 OPTION Level 3 Description BK-LIGHT not used EDITOR>OPTION Items Level 1 OPTION 13-308 Level 2 Level 3 Description ED-MODE use it to switch editor operation mode (0: prohibit input, 1: 1-point input, 2: continuous input) COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING BODY COPIER>OPTION CVR-TYPE Description Use it to switch data display within the DISPLAY>CCD screen. Use it to enter a CVR version. MODEL-SZ Use it to switch the destination. F-WEB Use it to change the frequency of turning on the fixing cleaning belt. Use it to switch the gradation correction data, contrast potential obtained by auto gradation correction Use it to smooth out the gradation of an image from an external image controller.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING USER Selects user-related settings. COPIER>OPTION Remarks Level 3 METAL Description Use it to turn on and off precious mode. OHP-MODE Use it to select the copy image maximum density or copying on transparencies. COPY-LIM COUNTER1 COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER6 Use it to change the upper limit on the copy count. Use it to select a counter type to suit the user or dealer (soft counter 1 through 4 on the control panel of a 120/230-V model).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Level 3 CONTROL Remarks Description Disabling ID Number Input with Conditions · 3rd digit of CONTROL Black-andwhite copying Remote printing Remote scanning 0 NO NO NO 1 NO NO YES 2 NO YES YES 3 YES YES YES 4 YES YES YES Note: See the Reference Table. Reference Table Disabling control key with conditions Disabling control card with conditions Disabling ID No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Level 3 CONTROL COLDOFST MONO-SPD 13-312 Description 2 For CC-X The device* total counter is incremented under all conditions; i.e., disabling control key, control card, or ID No. input with conditions. In the case of '3' or '4' for black-and-white copying without a card, the CC-V card counter will not be incremented. In the case of '2', '3', or '4' for remote printing without a card, the CC-X card counter will not be incremented.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING CST Selects cassette-related settings. Level 3 P-SZ-C1 P-SZ-C2 Description Use it to select a paper size for cassette 1. Use it to select a paper size for cassette 2 (for CLC1150, cassette 1). COPIER>OPTION Remarks See Table 13-608. ACC Selects accessory-related settings. Level 3 COIN DK-P Description Use it to turn on/off the coin vendor notation. Use it to select a paper size for the paper deck. Remarks 0: A4 1: B5 2: LTR INT-FACE Selects interface-related settings.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Soft Counter Specifications No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING No. 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Counter print 1 print 2 print (full color 1) print (full color 2) print (mono color 1) print (mono color 2) print (black-and-white 1) print (black-and-white 2) Function P P P P P P P P Color All All 4C 4C Mono Mono Bk Bk Paper size M M M M M M M M Count for doublesided sheet - Increment for largesize sheet 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 Table 13-707a COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Counter No.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Codes and Cassette Paper Sizes Code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Notation A1 A2 A3R A3 A4R A4 A5 A5R B1 B2 B3 B4R B4 B5R B5 11x17 LTRR LTR STMT STMTR Paper A1 A2 A3R A3 A4R A4 A5 A5R B1 B2 B3 B4R B4 B5R B5 11x17 Letter-R Letter Statement Statement-R Code 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Notation LGL K-LGL K-LGLR FLSC A-FLS OFI E-OFI B-OFI A-LTR A-LTRR G-LTR G-LTRR A-LGL G-LGL FGLI A-OFI Paper Legal Korean Government K
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Projector-Related Items Level 3 BK-LIGHT (not used) PRJ>OPTION Description Use it to enable or disable indication of a mode on the User screen when copying positive film with a protective sheet using back light BOX. Editor-Related Items Level 3 ED-MODE 13-320 EDITOR>OPTION Description Use it to switch editor operation mode. COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING G.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING PG COPIER>TEST Generates test prints. Level 3 TYPE Description Use it to enter the type No. of a test print, and press the Copy Start key to start printing. TXPH Use it to switch the number of lines used for test printing. THRU Use it to switch LUT used for test printing. DENS-Y DENS-M DENS-C DENS-K COLOR-Y COLOR-M COLOR-C COLOR-K Use it to set the output (each color) for each TYPE. · For example, to generate on M mono test print, set COLOR-M to '1', and others to '0'.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING H. COUNTER (counter mode) The COUNTER mode screen looks like the following, and it offers the items discussed on the pages that follow: TOTAL TOTAL PERIODEC SCANNER DURABLE PICK-UP PICK-UP COLOR FEEDE FEEDER JAM MISC Figure 13-720 · You can check the number of times each mechanism has operated. Resetting a Counter Reading 1) Select an item to highlight. 2) Press the Clear key on the control panel. The counter will be reset to '00000000'.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING COPIER>COUNTER Items Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Description COUNTER TOTAL SERVICE1 SERVICE2 TTL L-TTL total counter 1 for service total counter 2 for service total counter (copy + printer + synthesis) large-size copy total counter (copy+ printer + synthesis) small-size copy total counter (copy + printer + image synthesis) color large-size copy total counter (copy + print + synthesis) color small-size copy total counter (cop + print + synthesis) black large-size copy total cou
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING SCANNER SC-TTL SC-COPY SC-PRINT SC-PSXJ scanner total scan counter scan counter during copying scan counter during printing PS-XJ scan counter PICK-UP C1 L-C1 S-C1 C2 L-C2 S-C2 C3 L-C3 S-C3 MF L-MF S-MF DK 2-SIDE L-2-SIDE S-2-SIDE cassette 1 copy total counter cassette 1 large size copy total counter cassette 1 small-size copy total counter cassette 2 copy total counter cassette 2 large-size copy total counter cassette 2 small-size copy total counter cassette 3 copy total co
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING PERIODEC OZ-FIL2 OZ-FIL5 OZ-FIL6 AR-FIL1 AR-FIL3 AR-FIL14 AR-FIL15 TN-FIL5 TN-FIL6 ozone filter fan (FM2) drive period (in sec) ozone filter fan (FM5) drive period (in sec) ozone filter fan (FM6) drive period (in sec) air filter fan (FM1) drive period (in sec) air filter fan (FM3) drive period (in sec) air filter fan (FM4) drive period (in sec) air filter fan (FM15) drive period (in sec) toner filter fan FM5) drive period (in sec) toner filter fan (FM6) drive period (in sec) D
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING TR-SHEET SP-PU-RL FX-UP-RL FX-LW-RL OIL-APF DP-PU-RL DP-FD-RL DP-SP-RL D-PFRL-F D-PFRL-R OIL-APBL FHTR-U FHTR-L PRE-LMP PRM-UNIT SP-UNIT INT-UNIT EXT-UNIT CLR-UNIT C1-PU-RL C2-PU-RL C3-PU-RL C1-SP-RL C2-SP-RL C3-SP-RL C1-FD-RL C2-FD-RL C3-FD-RL DV-UNT-Y DV-UNT-M DV-UNT-C DV-UNT-K PD-PU-RL PD-FD-RL transfer drum sheet paper passage (number of sheets) separation push-up roll paper passage (number of sheets) fixing upper roller paper passage (number of sheets) fixing lower roller p
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING PD-SP-RL FX-IN-BS 13-328 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. paper deck separation roller paper passage (number of sheets) fixing insulating bush paper passage (number of sheets) CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS A. Copier The R-CPU and the DC-CPU of the copier's CPU PCB are equipped with a self diagnostic mechanism to check the state of the machine (particularly, the condition of sensors). The mechanism runs checks as needed, and indicates a code on the control panel when it finds a fault. The tables that follow show codes and timing of detection, the latter with discussions of detail codes indicated in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM/ERR).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E004 Cause · The SSR1 has a short circuit. · The CPU PCB is faulty. E005 · The cleaning belt inside the fixing assembly has been taken up for a specific length. · The fixing cleaning belt length sensor (PS11/PS67) is faulty. · The DC driver PCB is faulty. · The CPU PCB is faulty. E008 · The fixing oil pump driver PCB is faulty. · The DC driver PCB is faulty. · The CPU PCB is faulty. E010 · The main motor (M4) is faulty.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E016 E017 E020 Cause · The cleaning blade reciprocating motor (M7) is faulty. · The DC driver PCB is faulty. · The CPU PCB is faulty. · The duplexing motor (M14) is faulty. · The DC driver PCB is faulty. · The CPU PCB is faulty. The discussions that follow are compiled according to detail code. · The toner concentration sensor is faulty. · The developer inside the developing assembly is not stirred properly.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E020 · · · · Cause The toner concentration sensor is faulty. The developer inside the developing assembly is not stirred properly. The sensor is subjected to stray light (no cover, front cover open). The photosensitive drum has deteriorated. · The toner concentration sensor is faulty/soiled. · The developer inside the developing assembly is not stirred properly. · The sensor is subjected to stray light (no cover, front cover open).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E020 · · · · Cause The toner concentration sensor is faulty/ soiled. The developer inside the developing assembly is not stirred properly. The sensor is subjected to stray light (no cover, front cover open). The photosensitive drum has deteriorated. xx24 xx30 xx31 · The toner concentration sensor is faulty. · The developer inside the developing assembly is not stirred properly. · The sensor is subjected to stray light (no cover, front cover open).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E020 · · · · · · Cause The toner concentration sensor is faulty. The developer inside the developing assembly is not stirred properly. The sensor is subjected to stray light (no cover, front cover open). The photosensitive drum has deteriorated. The window of the toner concentration sensor is soiled or scratched, or the protective sheet is soiled. The photosensitive drum is soiled (e.g., cleaning fault).
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E020 Cause The backup data on the CPU PCB is faulty* or the initial settings have not been made. *Be sure to initialize the RAM of the DC-CPU and enter the values recorded on the service label. xx63 xx64 xx65 xx66 xx70 xx71 xx72 xx73 xx74 xx75 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Timing of detection During copying sequence, the level of PT-SIG-M/C/Y is '683' or less or that of PT-SIGK is '305' or less because of an error in the memory backup data.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E020 Cause The backup data on the CPU PCB is faulty* or the initial settings have not been made. *Be sure to initialize the RAM of the DC-CPU and enter the values recorded on the service label. The developer has deteriorated. · The developing cylinder fails to rotate. · The developing assembly is not locked. · The toner concentration (patch detection) sensor is faulty. · The developer inside the developing assembly is faulty. · The toner level sensor is faulty.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E020 Cause The developer has deteriorated. · The developing cylinder fails to rotate. · The developing assembly is not locked. · The toner concentration (patch detection) sensor is faulty. · The developer inside the developing assembly is faulty. · The toner level sensor is faulty. · The concentration sensor is subjected to stray light (no cover, front cover open). · The photosensitive drum has deteriorated. · The developer has deteriorated.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E021 · · · · · Cause The developing locking motor (PM1, PM2, PM3, PM4) is faulty. The developing assembly HP sensor (PS49, PS51, PS53, PS55) is faulty. The developing locking driver PCB is faulty. The DC driver PCB is faulty. The CPU PCB is faulty. 0100 0200 0300 0400 0101 0201 0301 0401 E040 · The lifter motor drive system is subjected to an overload. · The lifter motor (M11, M12/ DM12, M13/DM13, M15) is faulty. · The CPU PCB is faulty.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E041 · · E051 · · · · · · Cause The deck lifter motor (M101) is faulty. The deck lifter position sensor (PS104) is faulty. The deck lifter cable is broken. The deck driver PCB is faulty. The duplexing paper jogging guide motor (PM14) is faulty. The duplexing paper jogging guide HP sensor (PS40) is faulty. The duplexing driver PCB is faulty. The CPU PCB is faulty. E061 · The potential sensor is faulty. · The pre-exposure lamp is faulty.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E061 Cause · The laser is faulty. · · · · 13-340 The laser light is inadequate. The bending mirror is faulty. The laser shutter is faulty. The laser is faulty. 0051 0052 0053 · The dark area potential attenuation is at the upper control limit. 0060 · The grid bias is at the upper control limit. · The grid bias is at the lower control limit. · The developing bias is at the upper control limit. · The developing bias is at the lower control limit.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E062 E067 E071 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Cause · SSR2 has a short circuit. · The CPU PCB is faulty. · The separation charging assembly is faulty. · The internal/external static eliminator is faulty. · The HVT-AC PCB is faulty. · The DC driver PCB is faulty. · The CPU PCB is faulty. · The side A sensor (PS2) is faulty. · The side B sensor (PS3) is faulty. · The C sensor (PS4) is faulty. · The signal plate is faulty.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E071 · · · · · · · · Cause The side A sensor (PS2) is faulty. The side B sensor (PS3) is faulty. The C sensor (PS4) is faulty. The signal plate is faulty. The drum motor drive system is subjected to an overload. The transfer drum locking mechanism is faulty. The DC driver PCB is faulty. The CPU PCB is faulty. 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 13-342 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E071 · · · · · · · · · · · · · Cause The side A sensor (PS2) is faulty. The side B sensor (PS3) is faulty. The C sensor (PS4) is faulty. The signal plate is faulty. The drum motor drive system is subjected to an overload. The transfer drum locking mechanism is faulty. The DC driver PCB is faulty. The CPU PCB is faulty. Side A sensor (PS2) is faulty. Side B sensor (PS3) is faulty. The C sensor (PS4) is faulty. The signal plate is faulty.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E071 · · · · · · · · Cause Side A sensor (PS2) is faulty. Side B sensor (PS3) is faulty. The C sensor (PS4) is faulty. The signal plate is faulty. The drum motor drive system is subjected to an overload. The transfer drum is not locked properly. The DC driver PCB is faulty. The CPU PCB is faulty. 1108 1201 1202 1203 · · · · · The side A sensor (PS2) is faulty. The side B sensor (PS3) is faulty. The C sensor (PS4) is faulty. The signal plate is faulty.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E071 · · · · · · · · E072 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Cause The side A sensor (PS2) is faulty. The side B sensor (PS3) is faulty. The C sensor (PS4) is faulty. The signal plate is faulty. The drum motor drive system is subjected to an overload. The transfer drum is not locked properly. The DC driver PCB is faulty. The CPU PCB is faulty. · The transfer drum cleaner brush motor (M8) is faulty. · The polishing roller motor (M9) is faulty.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E073 Cause · The transfer unit drawer connector is faulty. · The DC driver PCB is faulty. · The CPU PCB is faulty. E074 · The transfer drum locking motor (PM5) is faulty. · The transfer drum HP sensor (PS57) is faulty. · The transfer locking driver PCB is faulty. · The DC driver PCB is faulty. · The CPU PCB is faulty. E079 · The transfer drum cleaner HP sensor (PS59) is faulty. · The transfer locking driver PCB is faulty. · The DC driver PCB is faulty.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code (E202) · · No code indication; keys are disabled. E208 · · · · · E220 E305 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. · · · Cause The original scanner HP sensor (PS1) is faulty. The original scanner motor (PM15) is faulty. The original scanner motor driver PCB is faulty. The CPU PCB is faulty. The DC power supply to the original scanner motor driver PCB is faulty. The wiring or connectors are faulty. The original scanner motor driver PC is faulty. The CPU PCB is faulty.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code Cause The IP-MAIN PCB is faulty. The IP-ECO PCB is faulty. The connection between IP-MAIN, IP-ECO PCB, and laser driver PCB is faulty. The IP-ED PCB is faulty. The IP-MAIN PCB is faulty. E351 · · · E620 · · E634 · The projector lamp is faulty. · The projector thermal switch is faulty. · The CPU PCB is faulty. · The DC power supply is faulty. E700 E717 E718 E800 E804 13-348 · An error has occurred in conjunction with the copy data controller/remote diagnosis device.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E804 Cause · The operation of a fan (indicated by detail code) is faulty. · The CPU PCB is faulty. · The DC driver PCB is faulty. Timing of detection 000B The power supply cooing fan 1/2 (FM9/FM13) has stopped in error. 000C The power supply cord base fan (FM17) has stopped to rotate in error. 0102 The original exposure system cooling fan 2/3 (FM14/FM15) has stopped to rotate in error. Caution: 1.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING B. RDF Note: If the self diagnostic mechanism has turned on, you can reset the machine by turning the copier's power switch off and then on. If you want to continue to make copies while the RDF is out of order, place the original on the copyboard glass after lifting the RDF. Code E400 E401 E402 E403 E404 E405 E407 E408 E411 13-350 Cause · The communication of data with the copier is faulty. · The pickup motor (M1) is faulty.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING C. Sorter Code E510 Cause · The feed motor (M1) fails to rotate. E516 · The low-speed feed motor (M10) fails to rotate. E517 · The home position of the buffer path unit locking cam cannot be detected. E522 · The push bar motor (M7) fails to rotate. E523 · The reference wall motor (M6) fails to rotate. E524 · The multi guide motor (M5) fails to rotate. E525 · The bin internal paper sensor 1 (S3, S4) auto adjustment mechanism is faulty.
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E532 Cause · The stapler unit shift motor (M3) fails to rotate. E533 · The stapler internal paper sensor auto adjustment mechanism is faulty. E540 · The bin shift motor (M9) fails to rotate. E550 · The DC output from the sorter controller PCB is faulty. 13-352 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. Timing of detection The operation does not end within 5000 msec after the motor drive signal has been generated.
APPENDIX A. B. C. GENERAL TIMING CHART ....................................... A-1 SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS ....................... A-3 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................... A-9 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. D. E. F. PAPER DECK GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................. A-13 SPECIAL TOOLS ..................... A-15 SOLVENTS AND OILS ............ A-17 CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
A-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.0 MAR.
APPENDIX B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS 1.
APPENDIX C3PUCL/D1PUCL C3PUMA/D2PUMA C3PUMA*/D2PUMA* C3PUMB/D2PUMB C3PUMB*/D2PUMB* C3PUMHL/D2PUMHL C3PWVR/D2PWVR C3SZ0/D3SZ0 C3SZ1/D3SZ1 CBRCMA CBRCMB CDEVA CDEVA* CDEVB CDEVB* CDEVCL CDEVHL command CDEVHP CITOP CTEP CTNRSUP* DCFMERR DELFLSL* DINPD DJGHP DJOGMA DJOGMA* DJOGMB DJOGMB* DLCOVD DLFMERR DLFMON DLVP1D DLVP2D DREPD DRHERR DRHOFF DRMCLK DRMCW DRMFG DRMON DRMRDY DRMSP0 DRMSP1 DUPFDCL* DUPMLK DUPMON DUPPFSL* DUPPPD DUPSAPD DUPUMA DUPUMA* A-4 CASSETTE-3/2 PICK-UP CLUTCH command CASSETTE-3/2 PICK-UP
APPENDIX DUPUMB DUPUMB* DUPUMHL DVERPCL ENDPLSL* EXFMERR EXFMON FDC1D FDC2D/FDD1D FDC3D/FDD2D FDCOVD FXMLK FXMON FXMSP0 FXMSP1 FXOILD GGUIDSL HOPMCW HOPMLK HOPMON HUM HVATC HVATI HVCC HVCI HVGI HVGIC HVIDCC HVIDCI HVIOC HVPR HVTRC HVTRI INDELD IPFMERR IPFMON ITOP KDEVA KDEVA* KDEVB KDEVB* KDEVCL KDEVHL KDEVHP KEYSW* KTNRSUP* L-ON L-RDY LCOVD LFRCWD COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
APPENDIX LHON LSMCLK LSMON LSMRDY LTHM3 LTHM4 LWEBSL M-REF M-SGNL MDEVA MDEVA* MDEVB MDEVB* MDEVCL MDEVHL MDEVHP MFCOVD MFFDCL MFLFMA MFLFMB MFLHD MFLLD MFPAD MFPUCL MFPUD MFPUSL MFPWVR MNMON MNMRDY MTEP MTNRSUP* OHPDTC OTDELD* OZFMERR OZFMON PCDTC PCFDCL PCFMERR PCFMON PCMFMERR PELA1ON PH/TX/H200 POSTJD PRDMA PRDMB PREJD PRERGD PRIMFW DRIVE command PRIMRV DRIVE command PRM1A A-6 LOWER FIXING HEATER ON command LASER SCANNER MOTOR CLOCK signal LASER SCANNER MOTOR command LASER SCANNER MOTOR READY signal L
APPENDIX PRM1A* PRM1B PRM1B* PRM1HL PRM2A PRM2A* PRM2B PRM2B* PRM2HL PUFMERR PUFMON PUP1SL PUP2SL/PUPD1SL PUP3SL/PUPD2SL PUVP1AD PUVP2AD PUVP3AD PVE RCOVD REFMERR REFMON REGCL* REGDTC REPUCL* RGRLSL RPUVPD SCDSL SCFMERR SCFMON SCHP SHUTOFF* SJAMD SL1FMERR SL1FMON SL2FMERR SL2FMON SL3FMERR SL3FMON SPACC SPACI SPDCC SPDCI SSPUPSL STCLOSE* STOPEN* TEMP TNFMERR TNFMON TRCMLK TRCMON TRDCMA TRDCMA* TRDCMB COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
APPENDIX TRDCMB* TRDCMHL TRDCPHP TRDMA TRDMA* TRDMB TRDMB* TRDMHL TRDPHP UFRCWD UHON UTHM1 UTHM2 UWEBSL VCLK VD0-VD7 WTNRBD signal WTONER Y-REF Y-SGNL YDEVA YDEVA* YDEVB YDEVB* YDEVCL YDEVHL command YDEVHP YTEP YTNRSUP* TRANSFER DRUM CLEANER MOTOR command TRANSFER DRUM CLEANER MOTOR HOLD command TRANSFER DRUM CLEANER HOME POSITION SENSOR signal TRANSFER DRUM MOTOR command TRANSFER DRUM MOTOR command TRANSFER DRUM MOTOR command TRANSFER DRUM MOTOR command TRANSFER DRUM MOTOR HOLD command TRANSFER DRUM HOME
General Circuit Diagram (1/3) C. 9 8 7 6 230V ONLY N 98 9 3 3 GND 99 6 4 4 8.8V 100 5 5 5 8.8V 101 15 6 6 GND 102 14 7 7 -8V 103 J913M 3 8 8 8 GND 104 J913F GND 4 8.
General Circuit Diagram (2/3) 4 3 2-cassette pickup assembly (CLC1120/1130 only) 3-cassette pickup assembly (CLC1130 only) 1-cassette pickup assembly (CLC1150 only)* 2-cassette pickup assembly (CLC1150 only)* 1 J633H J633B 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 6 7 9 1 8 2 3 11 12 10 6 4 9 5 5 8 4 1 3 1 2 7 6 8 9 4 7 10 3 6 2 +24V +5V MFLHD* GND +5V MFPUD* GND 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 MFPWVR 1 GND MFPUSL* 8 4 GND 3 REF MFLFMA 9 6 +5V 5 MFPAD* MFLFMB 14 +24V MFPUC
General Circuit Diagram (3/3) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Developing assembly Bk developing assembly HP sensor J599 GND YDEVHP +5V GND CDEVHP +5V C toner supply clutch Y toner supply clutch Bk toner supply clutch CL5 CL6 CL7 CL8 CL CL CL CL 1 2 1 2 1 2 CTNRSUP* +24V YTNRSUP* +24V KTNRSUP* +24V 4 3 2 1 MT122 5 MT120 6 MT118 2 MT116 1 MT121 +24V MT119 W J675H J675B MTNRSUP* MT117 J674H J674B 7 MT115 J673H J673B 8 3 1 BKTEP 2 +5V 3 2 M toner supply clutch J67
D.
APPENDIX E. SPECIAL TOOLS You will need the following special tools to service the copier in addition to the standard tools set: No. Tool name Tool number Shape Rank Remarks 1 Laser power checker FY9-4013 A Use it in combination with a digital multimeter when adjusting the intensity of laser from the laser unit. 2 Digital multimeter CK-0436 A Use it when making electrical checks; use it in combination with a laser power checker when adjusting the intensity of light from the laser unit.
APPENDIX No. Tool name Tool number Shape Rank Remarks 7 CA1 test sheet FY9-9030-000 A Use it when adjusting or checking images. 8 Mirror positioning tool (front, rear) FY9-3040-000 B Use it when adjusting the distance between No. 1 and No. 2 mirrors; use it in combination with a mirror positioning tool. 9 S-B gap gauge FY9-3044 B Use it to adjust the S-B gap of the developing assembly.
APPENDIX F. No. SOLVENTS AND OILS Name Uses Remarks Composition 1 Alcohol Cleaning: e.g., glass, plastic, rubber; external covers. Fluorine family hydrocarbon Alcohol Surface activating agent Water · Do not bring near fire. · Procure locally. · Isopropyl alcohol may be used. 2 Solvent Cleaning: e.g., metal; soiling by oil or toner. Fluorine family hydrocarbon Alcohol Chorine family hydrocarbon · Do not bring near fire. · Procure locally. 3 Heat-resisting grease Lubricating: e.g.
Prepared by Office Imaging Products Technical Support Division Office Imaging Products Quality Assurance Center CANON INC. Printed in Japan REVISION 0 (MAR.
This publication is printed on 70% reprocessed paper. PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 0499S1.
